ibm system storage n series introduction and planning guide

220
IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide GA32-0543-11

Upload: snafudude

Post on 10-Apr-2015

1.074 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM System Storage N series

Introduction and Planning Guide

GA32-0543-11

���

Page 2: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide
Page 3: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM System Storage N series

Introduction and Planning Guide

GA32-0543-11

���

Page 4: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note:

Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in “Notices” on page 175.

The following paragraph does not apply to any country (or region) where such provisions are inconsistent with local

law.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (or regions) do

not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply

to you.

Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality.

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005, 2008. All rights reserved.

US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract

with IBM Corp.

Page 5: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Contents

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Safety and environmental notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Safety notices and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Danger notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Caution notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Attention notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Usage restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Rack safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Rack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Safety inspection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Rack relocation (19″ rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

Relocating the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Product recycling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Battery return program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

Fire suppression systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

Who should read this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

Supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

Notices and statements used in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv

Getting information, help, and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv

Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv

Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Web sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Supported servers and operating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Firmware updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Conventions and terminology used in this document . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi

Command conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi

Formatting conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi

Keyboard conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii

How to send your comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system . . . . . . . . 1

IBM N series storage systems and expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Expansion unit support (filers only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Intermixing EXN units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Data ONTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Adapter support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Clustering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

N3300 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

N3300 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

N3300 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Connecting expansion units to the N3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 iii

Page 6: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N3300 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

N3600 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

N3600 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

N3600 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Connecting expansion units to the N3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

N3600 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

N3700 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Connecting expansion units to the N3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

N3700 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

N5200 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

N5200 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

N5200 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Connecting expansion units to the N5200 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

N5200 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

N5200 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

N5200 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

N5200 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

N5200 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

N5300 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

N5300 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

N5300 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Connecting expansion units to the N5300 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

N5300 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

N5300 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

N5300 Model G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

N5300 Model G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

N5300 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

N5500 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

N5500 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

N5500 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Connecting expansion units to the N5500 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

N5500 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

N5500 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

N5500 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

N5500 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

N5500 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

N5600 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

N5600 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

N5600 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Connecting expansion units to the N5600 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

N5600 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

N5600 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

N5600 Model G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

N5600 Model G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

N5600 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

N7700 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

N7700 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

N7700 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Connecting expansion units to the N7700 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

N7700 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

iv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 7: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N7700 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

N7700 Model G11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

N7700 Model G21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

N7700 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

N7900 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

N7900 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

N7900 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Connecting expansion units to the N7900 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

N7900 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

N7900 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

N7900 Model G11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

N7900 Model G21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

N7900 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI and Fibre Channel . . . 65

Configuration limits for single-controller N7000 series and N5000 series

storage systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series storage

systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems . . . . 67

Configuration limits for active/active N3300 and N3600 systems . . . . . . 68

Configuration limits for single controller N3700 systems . . . . . . . . . 68

Configuration limits for active/active N3700 systems . . . . . . . . . . 69

EXN1000 expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

EXN1000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

EXN2000 expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

EXN2000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

EXN4000 expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

EXN4000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Rack mount requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features . . . . . . . 75

IBM N series host software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Chapter 4. Site planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

N3300 and N3600 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

N3700 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

N5000 series system hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

N7000 series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

EXN1000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Important factors to consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Rack considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Power supplies and power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

System input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Primary computer power service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Computer room emergency power-off controls . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Three-phase power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Thermal considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Floor-loading specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Contents v

Page 8: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Floor plan considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Creating a floor plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 5. Cable planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Cable measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Cable labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Connecting expansion units to filers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Expansion unit cabling requirements (filers only) . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Connecting the expansion unit directly to the N series filer storage system 116

Connecting the expansion unit to other expansion units . . . . . . . 116

Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 6. AutoSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

How does AutoSupport work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Interaction with mail hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Short e-mail messages for urgent events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Technical Support response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Cluster considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Recommended AC power line sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems . . . . . . . 123

FRU/CRU list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Power cord list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Appendix C. IBM N series worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

N3300 and N3600 system setup worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

N3700 system setup worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

N3700 cluster system setup worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

N5000 series system setup information worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . 131

N7000 series system setup information worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Appendix D. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks . . . . . . . . 133

2101 Model N00 rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

7014 Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Model T00 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Model T42 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

T00 and T42 service clearances and caster location . . . . . . . . . . 135

T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading . . . . . . . . . 137

Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack 141

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 . . . . . . 145

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . 145

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . 145

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . 145

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . 146

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . 146

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024) . . . . . . . 146

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . 147

vi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 9: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) . . . . 147

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500

systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003) . . . . . . . . . . 149

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004) . . . . . . . . 150

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) . . . . . . . 150

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster

filer) (FC 1006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) . . . . . . . 151

Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008) . . . . 152

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . . 152

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . . 152

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . . . 153

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC

1018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019) . . . . . . . . . . 153

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020) . . . . . . . . 154

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027) . . . . . . . . 154

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600

systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . 157

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . 158

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . 158

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . 158

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) . . . . . . . . . . 159

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper) (FC 1022) . . . . . . . . 160

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . 160

Dual-port Ultra320 SCSI HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024) . . . . . . . 160

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . 160

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) . . . . 161

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032) . . . . . . 161

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) 162

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 163

PCI-X Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . 164

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . 164

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . 164

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . . 164

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . . 164

PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . 165

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . 165

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . 166

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . 166

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) . . . . . . . . . 167

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . 167

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper) (FC 1022) . . . . . . . 167

Contents vii

Page 10: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . 168

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024) . . . . . . 168

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . 168

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) . . . 168

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032) . . . . . 169

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC

1035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Appendix I. IBM System Storage N series documentation . . . . . . . 171

N7000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

N5000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

N3300 and N3600 storage systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

N3700 storage system library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units library . . . . . . . . 171

Data ONTAP 7.2 filer library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Data ONTAP 7.1 filer library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Data ONTAP 7.2 gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Other N series and N series-related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement . . . . . 177

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . . . . 177

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada . . . . . . . 177

European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . 177

Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . 178

People’s Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . 179

Taiwan Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . 179

Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

viii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 11: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Figures

1. Ground check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks. . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

7. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

8. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

9. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 ix

Page 12: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

x IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 13: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Safety and environmental notices

This section contains information about:

v “Safety notices and labels”

v “Laser safety” on page xiv

v “Rack safety” on page xv

v “Product recycling and disposal” on page xix

v “Battery return program” on page xx

v “Fire suppression systems ” on page xxii

Safety notices and labels

When using this product, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices

contained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the

severity of the safety condition.

The following sections define each type of safety notice and provide examples.

The following notices and statements are used in IBM® documents. They are listed

below in order of increasing severity of potential hazards. Follow the links for more

detailed descriptions and examples of the danger, caution, and attention notices in

the sections that follow.

v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.

v “Attention notices” on page xiii: These notices indicate potential damage to

programs, devices, or data.

v “Caution notices” on page xiii: These statements indicate situations that can

be potentially hazardous to you.

v “Danger notices”: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially

lethal or extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly to

products to warn of these situations.

v In addition to these notices, “Labels” on page xii may be attached to the product

to warn of potential hazards.

Danger notices

A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely

hazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol accompanies a danger notice to

represent a dangerous electrical condition. A sample danger notice follows.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place

hazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices

that attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customer

to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to

prevent an electrical shock.

A comprehensive danger notice provides instructions on how to avoid shock

hazards when servicing equipment. Unless instructed otherwise, follow the

procedures in the following danger notice.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 xi

Page 14: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

DANGER

Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and

communication cables are hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:

v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform

installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product

during an electrical storm.

v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded

electrical outlet. Ensure outlet supplies proper voltage and

phase rotation according to the system rating plate.

v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to

properly wired outlets.

v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect

signal cables.

v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire,

water, or structural damage.

v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications

systems, networks, and modems before you open the device

covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and

configuration procedures.

v Connect and disconnect cables as described below when

installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or

attached devices.

To Disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise).

2. Remove power cords from the outlet.

3. Remove signal cables from connectors.

4. Remove all cables from devices.

To Connect:

1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise).

2. Attach all cables to devices.

3. Attach signal cables to connectors.

4. Attach power cords to outlet.

5. Turn device ON.

Labels

As an added precaution, safety labels are often installed directly on products or

product components to warn of potential hazards.

The actual product safety labels may differ from these sample safety labels:

DANGER

Hazardous voltage, current, or energy levels are present

inside any component that has this label attached.

Do not service, there are no serviceable parts.

xii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 15: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

DANGER

Multiple power cords

To remove all power to the device, disconnect all power cords.

Caution notices

A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people

because of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied by

different symbols, as in the examples below:

If the symbol is... It means...

A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than

electrical danger.

A generally hazardous condition not represented by other

safety symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the

product. Laser symbols are always accompanied by the

classification of the laser as defined by the U. S.

Department of Health and Human Services (for example,

Class I, Class II, and so forth).

Sample caution notices:

CAUTION:

This product is equipped with a 3–wire (two conductors and

ground) power cable and plug. Use this power cable with a properly

grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.

CAUTION:

Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting

on system links with laser modules that operate at greater than

Class 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an

optical fiber cable or open receptacle.

Attention notices

An attention notice indicates the possibility of damage to a program, device, or

system, or to data. An exclamation point symbol may accompany an attention

notice, but is not required. A sample attention notice follows:

Attention: Do not bend a fibre cable to a radius less than 5 cm (2 in.);

you can damage the cable. Tie wraps are not recommended for optical

cables because they can be easily overtightened, causing damage to the

cable.

Safety and environmental notices xiii

Page 16: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Laser safety

When using an NVRAM5 or NVRAM6 cluster media converter, the storage system

must be installed in a restricted access location.

CAUTION:

This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with optical

instruments. (C028)

This equipment contains Class 1 laser products, and complies with FDA radiation

Performance Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J and the international laser safety

standard IEC 825-2.

CAUTION:

Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on

system links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1

power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an optical fiber

cable or open receptacle.

Attention: In the United States, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that

comply with the FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.

Internationally, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that comply with IEC

standard 825–1. Optical products that do not comply with these standards may

product light that is hazardous to the eyes.

Usage restrictions

The optical ports of the modules must be terminated with an optical connector or

with a dust plug.

xiv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 17: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Rack safety

Rack installation

DANGER

v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.

v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.

v To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanical

loading, always install the heaviest devices in the bottom of

the rack cabinet. Always install servers and optional devices

starting from the bottom of the rack cabinets.

v Rack-mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or work

space. Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted

devices.

v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Be

sure to disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet before

servicing any device in the rack cabinet.

v Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power

devices installed in the same rack cabinet. Do not plug a

power cord from a device installed in one rack cabinet into a

power device installed in a different rack cabinet.

CAUTION:

v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient

temperatures will exceed the manufacturer’s recommended

ambient temperature for all your rack-mounted devices.

v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised.

Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side, front,

or back of a unit used for air flow through the unit.

v Consideration should be given to the connection of the

equipment to the supply circuit so that overloading of the

circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent

protection.

v To provide the correct power connection to a rack, refer to the

rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine

the total power requirement of the supply circuit.

v This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moved for

servicing unless specified by manufacturer. Attempting to move

the drawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause the

rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the

rack.

Safety inspection procedure

Perform a safety inspection on the rack when any of the following conditions occur:

v The rack is inspected under a maintenance agreement.

v Service is requested and service has not recently been performed.

v An alterations-and-attachments review is performed.

v Changes have been made to the equipment that might affect the safe operation

of the equipment.

Safety and environmental notices xv

Page 18: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v External devices with an attached power cord are connected to the rack.

Be cautious of potential safety hazards that are not covered in the safety checks. If

the inspection indicates an unacceptable safety condition, the condition must be

corrected before you can service the machine.

Note: It is the responsibility of the owner of the system to correct any unsafe

condition.

Do the following safety checks:

1. If the rack is bolted down, ensure that the rack is firmly secured to the floor.

2. If the rack is not bolted down, ensure that the stabilizers are firmly attached to

both the bottom front and bottom rear of the rack.

CAUTION:

The stabilizer must be firmly attached to the bottom front and bottom

rear of the rack to prevent the rack from turning over when the filers or

expansion units are pulled out of the rack. Do not pull out or install any

filer or expansion unit or feature if the stabilizer is not attached to the

rack.

3. Check the covers for sharp edges and for damage or alterations that expose

the internal parts of the rack.

4. Check the covers for a proper fit to the rack. The covers should be in place

and secure.

5. Open the back door of the rack.

6. Perform the power-off procedure for the power distribution unit (PDU) that is

installed in the rack.

7. Check for alterations or attachments. If there are any, check for obvious safety

hazards such as broken wires, sharp edges, or broken insulation.

8. Check the internal cables for damage.

9. Check for dirt, water, and any other contamination within the rack.

10. Check the voltage label on the back of the system unit to ensure that it

matches the voltage at the outlet.

11. Check the external power cable for damage.

12. Perform the following grounding checks:

a. With the external power cord connected to the system unit, check for 0.1

ohm or less resistance between the ground plug on the external power

cord plug and the metal frame. See Figure 1 on page xvii.

xvi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 19: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

b. Using the appropriate probe, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance between

the metal frame and the grounding pin on each of the power outlets on

each power distribution bus.

13. Check for the following conditions for each external device that has an

attached power cord:

v Damage to the power cord.

v The correct grounded power cord.

v With the external power cord connected to the device, check for 0.1 ohm or

less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cord plug and

the metal frame of the device.

14. Close the rear cover of the rack.

15. Perform the power-on procedure for the PDU that is installed in the rack.

Rear View

L1

L1

L1

RT000015

Figure 1. Ground check

Safety and environmental notices xvii

Page 20: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Rack relocation (19″ rack)

CAUTION:

Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves

rack stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever you

relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building:

v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at

the top of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the

configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration is

not known, you must do the following:

– Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.

– Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack

cabinet.

– Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices installed in the

rack cabinet below the 32U level.

– If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets,

detach the rack cabinet from the suite.

– Inspect the route that you plan to take when moving the rack to

eliminate potential hazards.

– Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the

loaded rack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that came with your

rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet.

– Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2030 mm (30 x 80 in.).

– Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.

– Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.

– Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinet

during movement.

– Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees.

– Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the following:

- Lower the four leveling pads.

- Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.

- If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack

cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position.

– If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the

configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rack

cabinet in the original packaging material, or equivalent. Also, lower the

leveling pads to raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack

cabinet to the pallet.

For additional information, refer to the documentation for your rack cabinet.

xviii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 21: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Relocating the rack

The following safety notices apply to the procedures in this section.

CAUTION:

Make sure that you do the following:

v Before you add or remove drawers, always have the leveling feet lowered

and the front and rear stabilizer installed, or have the rack bolted to the

floor.

v Always install drawers at the bottom of the rack first.

v Always remove drawers from the top of the rack first.

v Always install the heaviest drawers on the bottom of the rack.

v Remove two or three drawers from the top of the rack before you relocate

it.

v Never push on the sides of the rack.

Attention: If the rack has equipment located above EIA location 32, you must

remove the equipment in position 32 and above from the rack before you move it.

Always remove the equipment from the top of the rack first.

Complete the following steps before you relocate a rack:

1. Turn off all power to the rack and the system that is installed.

2. Disconnect all power cables.

3. Make sure that the rack is either bolted down or has the stabilizers installed

before continuing this procedure.

4. Before removing any drawers from the rack, ensure that the battery LEDs on

the controller units are NOT blinking. A blinking LED indicates that the batteries

are in use. To ensure that the batteries do not discharge during the relocation

process, remove and reseat the battery packs before removing the drawer.

Complete the following steps to relocate the rack:

1. Unbolt the rack from the floor or remove the stabilizers.

2. Raise all the leveling feet.

3. Unlock each caster wheel by loosening the screw on the caster.

4. Move the rack to the new position.

5. Reposition the rack.

For additional information, refer to the documentation for your rack cabinet.

Product recycling and disposal

This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national

regulations. IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to

responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. IBM offers a

variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist

equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on IBM product

recycling offerings can be found on IBM’s Internet site at: www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/index.shtml

Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la

normativa nacional o local aplicable. IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos

de tecnología de la informacion (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos

cuando éstos ya no les sean utiles. IBM dispone de una serie de programas y

Safety and environmental notices xix

Page 22: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

servicios de devolucion de productos en varios países, a fin de ayudar a los

propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar

informacion sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio web de

IBM www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/index.shtml.

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and

Norway.

Appliances are labelled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC

concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive

determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as

applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products

to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end

of life per this Directive.

Remarque: Cette marque s'applique uniquement aux pays de l'Union Européenne

et à la Norvège.

L'etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de

Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les

dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers

l'Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette précise que le

produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin

de vie.

In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic

equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or

recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the

WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted

municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the

return, recycling and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to

minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to

the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and

treatment, contact your local IBM representative.

Battery return program

This product may contain sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,

lithium, or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual for

specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly.

Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For information on disposal of

xx IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 23: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

batteries outside the United States, go to www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/batteryrecycle.shtml or contact your local waste disposal facility.

In the United States, IBM has established a return process for reuse, recycling, or

proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,

and other battery packs from IBM Equipment. For information on proper disposal of

these batteries, contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please have the IBM part number

listed on the battery available prior to your call.

For Taiwan:

Please recycle batteries.

For the European Union:

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).

Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European

Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries

and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and

recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European

Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to

be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.

Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux

directives européennes 2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs

en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs usés. Les directives déterminent la

marche à suivre en vigueur dans l’Union Européenne pour le retour et le recyclage

des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses

batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt

récupérée en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme.

Safety and environmental notices xxi

Page 24: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators

are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end

of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal

concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury and Cd for cadmium). Users

of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as

unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers

for the return, recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer

participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and

accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence

of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, contact your local

IBM representative.

For California:

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations

Title 22, Division 4.5 Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate

Materials. This product, part or both may include a lithium manganese dioxide

battery which contains a perchlorate substance.

Fire suppression systems

A fire suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. The customer’s own

insurance underwriter, local fire marshal, or a local building inspector, or both,

should be consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that provides the correct

level of coverage and protection. IBM designs and manufactures equipment to

internal and external standards that require certain environments for reliable

operation. Because IBM does not test any equipment for compatibility with fire

suppression systems, IBM does not make compatibility claims of any kind nor does

IBM provide recommendations on fire suppression systems.

xxii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 25: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

About this book

This document provides introductory and planning information for IBM System

Storage™ N series products, including N3300, N3600, and N3700 filers, N5000

series filers and gateways, N7000 series filers and gateways, and EXN1000,

EXN2000, and EXN4000 storage expansion units.

Who should read this document

This guide is for qualified system administrators and service personnel who are

familiar with IBM storage systems. This document is for customer use. This

document is intended to provide information to customers, operators, administrators,

installers, and service personnel.

Supported features

IBM System Storage N series storage systems and expansion boxes are driven by

NetApp® Data ONTAP® software. Some features described in the product software

documentation are neither offered nor supported by IBM. Please contact your local

IBM representative or reseller for further details.

Information about supported features can also be found at the following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

A listing of currently available N series products and features can be found at the

following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/nas/

How this document is organized

This document contains the following chapters:

v Chapter 1, “Planning for the IBM N series storage system,” on page 1

v Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 7

v Chapter 3, “IBM N series storage system software features,” on page 75

v Chapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 87

v Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 113

v Chapter 6, “AutoSupport,” on page 119

v Appendix A, “Recommended power line sizes,” on page 121

v Appendix B, “Power cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123

v Appendix C, “IBM N series worksheets,” on page 127

v Appendix D, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 133

v Appendix E, “Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 145

v Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,”

on page 149

v Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,”

on page 157

v Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on

page 163

v Appendix I, “IBM System Storage N series documentation,” on page 171

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 xxiii

Page 26: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Notices and statements used in this document

The caution and danger statements used in this document also appear in the

multilingual IBM Safety Information document. Each caution and danger statement

is numbered for easy reference to the corresponding statements in the safety

document.

The following types of notices and statements are used in this document:

v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.

v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid

inconvenient or problem situations.

v Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or

data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which

damage could occur.

v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous

to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially

hazardous procedure step or situation.

v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or

extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the

description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or

situation.

Getting information, help, and service

If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information

about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to

assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional

information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem

with your IBM System Storage N series product, and whom to call for service, if it is

necessary.

The following applies in Taiwan:

IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info:

IBM Taiwan Corporation

3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan

Tel: 0800-016-888

Before you call

Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the

problem yourself:

v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.

v Check the power switches to make sure that the system is turned on.

v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation and use the

diagnostic tools that come with your system.

v Check the IBM support Web site for known problems and limitations.

xxiv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 27: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Using the documentation

Information about the N series product and Data ONTAP software is available in

printed documents and a documentation CD that comes with your system. The

same documentation is available as PDF files on the IBM NAS support Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Web sites

IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest

technical information and download device drivers and updates.

v For NAS product information, go to the following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/nas/

v For NAS support information, go to the following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

v For AutoSupport information, go to the following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

v For the latest version of N series publications, go to the following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Hardware service and support

You can receive hardware service through IBM Integrated Technology Services.

Visit the following Web site for support telephone numbers:

www.ibm.com/planetwide/

Supported servers and operating systems

IBM N series products attach to many servers and many operating systems. To

determine the latest supported attachments, visit the following Web site and access

the IBM System Storage N series interoperability matrix:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Firmware updates

As with all devices, it is recommended that you run the latest level of firmware,

which is embedded in Data ONTAP. If there are changes, they will be posted to the

following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Note: If you do not see new changes on the Web site, you are running the latest

level of firmware.

Verify that the latest level of firmware is installed on your machine before contacting

IBM for technical support.

Conventions and terminology used in this document

This guide uses the following terminology, command conventions, format

conventions and keyboard conventions:

About this book xxv

Page 28: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Terminology

In this and other IBM N series documents, the term filer describes IBM N series

models that contain internal disk storage, attach to the disk storage expansion units

specifically designed for the IBM N series storage systems, or both. There are three

disk storage expansion units specifically designed for the IBM N series filers:

v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit

v IBM EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit

v IBM EXN1000 serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion

unit

Note: EXN expansion units are not intended for attachment to a gateway.

The term gateway describes IBM N series models that do not contain internal disk

storage or attach to disk storage expansion units. IBM N series gateways attach to

external storage devices on a Storage Area Network (SAN).

The terms system or storage system refer to either a gateway by itself or a filer,

either by itself or with additional disk drives.

In addition, this guide uses the following terms:

v AT-FCX refers to the controller module of the serial advanced technology

attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit.

v Active/active configuration (sometimes referred to as clustered configuration)

refers to a High Availability system with at least two nodes that share resources

to provide redundancy.

v Device carrier refers to the container that encases a fan/power supply unit or a

disk.

v Disk applies to any hard disk drive.

v Expansion unit refers to any expansion unit containing hard disk drives.

v ESH2 refers to the controller module of the EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage

expansion unit.

v ESH4 refers to the controller module of the EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage

expansion unit.

v Loop refers to one or more daisy-chained expansion units connected to a filer.

v Motherboard tray or CPU module refers to the system controller module that

executes the software on an N series storage system. The motherboard tray is at

the rear of the N series storage system.

v Node refers to a chassis. There is one node in the A10 and G10 models; there

are two nodes in the A20 and G20 models. Node also refers to a CPU module

when used in a clustered configuration.

Command conventions

You can enter commands on the system console or from any client that can obtain

access to the appliance using a Telnet session. In examples that illustrate

commands executed on a UNIX® workstation, the command syntax and output

might differ, depending on your version of UNIX.

Formatting conventions

The following table lists different character formats used in this guide to set off

special information.

xxvi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 29: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Formatting convention Type of information

Italic type v Words or characters that require special

attention.

v Placeholders for information you must

supply. For example, if the guide requires

you to enter the fctest adaptername

command, you enter the characters

“fctest” followed by the actual name of the

adapter.

v Book titles in cross-references.

Monospaced font v Command and daemon names.

v Information displayed on the system

console or other computer monitors.

v The contents of files.

Bold monospaced font Words or characters you type. What you type

is always shown in lowercase letters, unless

your program is case-sensitive and

uppercase letters are necessary for it to work

properly.

Keyboard conventions

This guide uses capitalization and some abbreviations to refer to the keys on the

keyboard. The keys on your keyboard might not be labeled exactly as they are in

this guide.

What is in this guide... What it means...

hyphen (-) Used to separate individual keys. For

example, Ctrl-D means holding down the Ctrl

key while pressing the D key.

Enter Used to refer to the key that generates a

carriage return, although the key is named

Return on some keyboards.

type Used to mean pressing one or more keys on

the keyboard.

enter Used to mean pressing one or more keys

and then pressing the Enter key.

How to send your comments

Your feedback is important in helping us provide the most accurate and high-quality

information. If you have comments or suggestions for improving this document,

send us your comments by e-mail to [email protected] or use the Readers’

Comments form at the back of this publication. Be sure to include the following:

v Exact publication title

v Form number (for example, GC26-1234-02)

v Page numbers to which you are referring

If the Reader Comment Form in the back of this manual is missing, you can direct

your mail to:

About this book xxvii

Page 30: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

International Business Machines Corporation

Information Development

Department GZW

9000 South Rita Road

Tucson, Arizona 85744-0001 U.S.A.

When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or

distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any

obligation to you.

xxviii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 31: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system

Successful installation of the IBM System Storage N series storage system requires

careful planning. You are the most valuable resource in site planning because you

have the most detailed understanding of how the N series storage system and

devices attached to it will be used.

Site preparation is the responsibility of the customer and this document will provide

basic information required to do this preparation. You may want to also enlist the

help of your Field Technical Support Specialist, marketing representative, or other

support personnel.

Your marketing representative is available to ensure that the hardware and software

that you have chosen will meet your needs.

Planning for the IBM N series storage system consists of these main tasks:

1. Understanding the features and functions of the N series storage system and

selecting the proper feature codes (FCs) for your business as described in

Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 7 and Chapter 3, “IBM N

series storage system software features,” on page 75.

2. Planning for the physical environment where the equipment will operate. This

planning step includes the physical space, electrical, temperature, humidity,

altitude, air flow, service clearance, and similar requirements as described in

Chapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 87.

3. Planning for cabling depends on the adapter feature codes (FCs) selected as

described in Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 113.

4. If required, planning for a dual-node clustered configuration for high availability

as described in “Clustering” on page 4.

5. Planning for reporting error information to IBM as described in Chapter 6,

“AutoSupport,” on page 119.

This chapter also introduces the following topics:

v “IBM N series storage systems and expansion units”

v “Expansion unit support (filers only)” on page 2

v “Data ONTAP” on page 3

v “Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)” on page 3

v “Interoperability” on page 3

v “Adapter support” on page 3

v “Clustering” on page 4

IBM N series storage systems and expansion units

The following IBM System Storage N series storage systems and expansion units

are described in Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 7.

v “N3300 hardware features” on page 7

v “N3600 hardware features” on page 10

v “N3700 hardware features” on page 13

v “N5200 filer hardware features” on page 17

v “N5200 gateway hardware features” on page 22

v “N5300 filer hardware features” on page 25

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 1

Page 32: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v “N5300 gateway hardware features” on page 29

v “N5500 filer hardware features” on page 32

v “N5500 gateway hardware features” on page 36

v “N5600 filer hardware features” on page 39

v “N5600 gateway hardware features” on page 44

v “N7700 filer hardware features” on page 47

v “N7700 gateway hardware features” on page 52

v “N7900 filer hardware features” on page 55

v “N7900 gateway hardware features” on page 60

v “EXN1000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 70

v “EXN2000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 71

v “EXN4000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 72

Expansion unit support (filers only)

There are currently three disk storage expansion units specifically designed for the

IBM N series filers:

v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit

v IBM EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit

v IBM EXN1000 serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion

unit

Note: EXN expansion units are not intended for attachment to a gateway.

Multiple EXN1000s, each having different SATA disk drive feature codes, may be

attached to the same N series filer on the same Fibre Channel loop.

Multiple EXN2000s and EXN4000s, each having different Fibre Channel disk drive

feature codes, may be attached to the same N series filer on the same Fibre

Channel loop.

For the latest storage expansion unit support information, visit the following Web

site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Intermixing EXN units

EXN4000s and EXN2000s are both Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units.

EXN4000 and EXN2000 expansion units can be mixed within the same loop, but

the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to the same

speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps).

Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in a supported N series filer

configuration is supported as follows:

v Intermixing Fibre Channel disk expansion units with SATA disk expansion units

on the same loop is not supported.

v EXN4000s or EXN2000s (Fibre Channel disk drives) and EXN1000s (SATA disk

drives) may be attached to the same N series filer only if the Fibre Channel disk

expansion units (EXN4000s or EXN2000s) are on separate loops than the SATA

disk expansion units (EXN1000s).

2 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 33: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Attention: Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in an N3700

configuration is not supported. Only N3300, N3600, N5000 and N7000 series

models support intermixing of Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in a

configuration.

Data ONTAP

N series storage systems are driven by the Data ONTAP operating system. Data

ONTAP is a highly optimized, scalable, and flexible operating system that can

handle mixed SAN and NAS environments. Data ONTAP delivers flexible

management and high availability, ensures business continuance, and provides data

permanence, thereby reducing storage management complexity in your enterprise.

Data ONTAP software integrates seamlessly into UNIX, Windows®, and Web

environments and provides the foundation to build your storage infrastructure and

an enterprise-wide data fabric for mission-critical business applications. The

operating system includes integrated secure access capabilities (SSL, SSH) and

FilerView, a Web-based element manager.

The innovative Data ONTAP architecture delivers scalable performance and a

flexible storage environment, that can be applied in many environments ranging

from small workgroups to enterprise data centers. Data ONTAP stores and serves

applications, consolidates data, and provides reliable data access throughout the

enterprise. The Data ONTAP operating system simplifies management and

optimizes storage utilization by combining file-system technology and a microkernel

design, enabling such features as flexible data management, scalability, and

heterogeneous access.

Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)

The WAFL (Write Anywhere File Layout) file system contributes to a high level of

data availability while providing dynamic and flexible data storage containers using

Flexible Volume technology as well as data protection using integrated, nonvolatile

RAM and a block-level checksum capability. The WAFL file system is designed

specifically to work in an NFS appliance. The primary focus is on the algorithms

and data structures that WAFL uses to implement Snapshots, which are read-only

clones of the active file system. WAFL uses a copy-on-write technique to minimize

the disk space that Snapshots consume.

Interoperability

The latest information on software and hardware interoperability can be accessed

at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Adapter support

There are no PCI adapter slots on the N3300 and N3700 systems. No additional

adapter options are supported for the N3300 and N3700 systems.

There is one available PCIe adapter slot per node on the N3600 storage system.

For an A20 model, adapters must be added in pairs, one per node, so that both

nodes are populated with one of the same type of PCIe adapter.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N3600 are described in Appendix E,

“Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 145.

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 3

Page 34: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

There are three available PCI-X adapter slots per node on the N5200 and N5500

storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCI-X adapter slots.

A20/G20 models have six available PCI-X adapter slots.) Adapters must be added

in pairs, one per node, to an A20/G20 model, so that both nodes are populated with

the same number of each type of PCI-X adapters.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

There are three available PCIe adapter slots per node on the N5300 and N5600

storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCIe adapter slots.

A20/G20 models have six available PCIe adapter slots.) Adapters must be added in

pairs, one per node, to an A20/G20 model, so that both nodes are populated with

the same number of each type of PCIe adapters.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are

described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and

N5600 systems,” on page 157.

There are five available PCIe adapter slots and three available PCI-X adapter slots

per node on the N7700 and N7900 storage systems. (The sixth PCIe adapter slot

on each N7700 or N7900 node is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter and is not

available for PCIe adapter card use). Adapters must be added in pairs, one per

node, to an A21/G21 model, so that both nodes are populated with the same

number of each type of PCI-X/PCIe adapters.

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage

systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by

N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

Clustering

Before beginning hardware planning, the key hardware decision is to decide if the

higher availability obtained by clustering two N series storage system nodes in a

single Model A20 is needed. Clustered configurations are referred to as

active/active configurations.

Two N series storage system nodes can be clustered together for higher availability

using the Cluster Failover (CFO) software feature. Each node continually monitors

its partner, mirroring the data for each other’s NVRAM.

The IBM N3300, N3600, and N3700 systems all contain both clustered nodes in the

same enclosure.

In all IBM N5000 and N7000 series models, a standard cluster contains two nodes,

with each node contained in a different enclosure. Both nodes must be the same N

series model. The two nodes are clustered through an Infiniband (IB) cluster cable

that is attached to the NVRAM5 adapter (for N5200 and N5500 models) or

NVRAM6 adapter (for N5300, N5600 and N7000 series models), which allows one

node to serve data to the disks of its failed partner node.

Configuring storage systems in a cluster provides the following benefits:

v Fault tolerance

4 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 35: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

When one node fails or becomes impaired, a takeover occurs, and the partner

node continues to serve the failed node’s data.

v Nondisruptive software upgrades

When you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues to serve

data for the halted node while you upgrade the node you halted. For more

information about nondisruptive upgrades, see the IBM System Storage N series

Data ONTAP Upgrade Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.

v Nondisruptive storage system and disk maintenance

When you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues to serve

data for the halted node while you replace or repair hardware in the node you

halted.

More information about clustering is provided in the following documents:

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and

Administration Guide

v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 5

Page 36: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

6 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 37: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features

This chapter describes the hardware features for the following N series products.

v “N3300 hardware features”

v “N3600 hardware features” on page 10

v “N3700 hardware features” on page 13

v “N5200 filer hardware features” on page 17

v “N5200 gateway hardware features” on page 22

v “N5300 filer hardware features” on page 25

v “N5300 gateway hardware features” on page 29

v “N5500 filer hardware features” on page 32

v “N5500 gateway hardware features” on page 36

v “N5600 filer hardware features” on page 39

v “N5600 gateway hardware features” on page 44

v “N7700 filer hardware features” on page 47

v “N7700 gateway hardware features” on page 52

v “N7900 filer hardware features” on page 55

v “N7900 gateway hardware features” on page 60

v “EXN1000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 70

v “EXN2000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 71

v “EXN4000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 72

This chapter also summarizes configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI in

“Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63 and rack mounting

information in “Rack mount requirements” on page 73.

N3300 hardware features

The IBM System Storage N3300 storage controller includes the Model A10, a

single-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit.

Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol

support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements.

The N3300 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission

in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the

IBM Eserver System p™, System i™ (NFS only), System x™ and System z™ (NFS

only) servers. Details and current information on N3300 interoperability is available

at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N3300 A10

The N3300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with

iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3300

Model A10 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch

rack. The base chassis includes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 7

Page 38: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor

v 1 GB random access ECC memory

v Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports

v One serial console port

v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port

v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans

v Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Note: Support for minimal zero drive configuration for attachment to the

EXN1000, EXN2000 or EXN4000 expansion units is available.

The N3300 Model A10 may be upgraded to an N3300 Model A20. The upgrade

from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3300 A20

The N3300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3300 Model

A10, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the

Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs

that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. The Model A20 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller.

The N3300 Model A20 includes:

v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors

v 2 GB random access ECC memory

v Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports

v Two serial console ports

v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports

v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans

v Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Note: Support for minimal zero drive configuration for attachment to the

EXN1000, EXN2000 or EXN4000 expansion units is available.

Connecting expansion units to the N3300

The N3300 storage controller supports both the EXN1000 Serial Advanced

Technology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit, and the EXN2000 and

EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. The maximum number of storage

expansion units that may be attached to either the Model A10 or A20 is four.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure

containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology

attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, or 1 GB physical

capacities. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U

rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14,

Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre

Channel disk drive speeds and capacities:

v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities

v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities

8 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 39: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 disk drives, all of a

particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM

System Storage N3300, you may not include storage expansion units containing

more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3300 system is determined by the

number of disk drives supported. The N3300 Model A10 and Model A20 each

support a maximum of 68 hard disk drives (12 internal and 56 via storage

expansion units).

Table 1 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the

N3300 Model A10 and Model A20:

Table 1. N3300 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

Internal 144 GB SAS

disk drives

n/a 12 1.72 TB

Internal 300 GB SAS

disk drives

n/a 12 3.60 TB

Internal 500 GB SATA

disk drives

n/a 12 6 TB

Internal 750 GB SATA

disk drives

n/a 12 9 TB

Internal 1 TB SATA disk

drives

n/a 12 12 TB

EXN1000 250 GB SATA

disk drives

4 56 14 TB

EXN1000 500 GB SATA

disk drives

4 56 28 TB

EXN1000 750 GB SATA

disk drives

4 56 42 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives

4 56 56 TB

EXN2000 144 GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

4 56 8.06 TB

EXN2000 300 GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

4 56 16.8 TB

EXN4000 144 GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

4 56 8.06 TB

EXN4000 300 GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

4 56 16.8 TB

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with

EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 9

Page 40: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N3300 feature codes

Table 2. N3300 feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2859 A10, A20 2011

144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4014

300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4015

500 GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4018

750 GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4019

1 TB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4020

HDD Blank Panel 2859 A10, A20 4099

Table 3. N3300 installation features codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2859 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N3300 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list for

N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N3600 hardware features

The IBM System Storage N3600 storage controller includes the Model A10, a

single-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit.

Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol

support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements.

The N3600 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission

in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the

IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only)

servers. Details and current information on N3600 interoperability is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N3600 A10

The Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI

support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3600 Model

A10 is a 4U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The base chassis includes:

v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor

v 2 GB random access ECC memory

v Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports

v One serial console port

v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port

v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans

v Support for 12 to 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

10 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 41: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: Support for minimal zero drive configuration for attachment to the

EXN1000, EXN2000 or EXN4000 expansion units is available.

The Model A10 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop. The

Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 4 gigabit Ethernet ports via the

addition of one optional dual-port Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or 1013). The

Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a

Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3600 A20

The Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3600 Model A10,

but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the

Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 also supports a

maximum of 104 drives. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs that are designed to

provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The Model

A20 is a 4U rack-mountable storage controller.

The Model A20 includes:

v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors

v 4 GB random access ECC memory

v Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports

v Two PCIe expansion slots

v Two serial console ports

v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports

v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans

v Support for 12 to 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Note: Support for minimal zero drive configuration for attachment to the

EXN1000, EXN2000 or EXN4000 expansion units is available.

For the Model A20, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is two.

The Model A20 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop. The

Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of eight gigabit Ethernet ports via the

addition of two optional dual-port gigabit Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or

1013).

Connecting expansion units to the N3600

The N3600 storage controller Models A10 and A20 can attach a maximum of two

storage expansion units, either EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure

containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology

attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, or 1 GB physical

capacities. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U

rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14,

Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre

Channel disk drive speeds and capacities:

v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities

v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities

Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 disk drives, all of a

particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 11

Page 42: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

System Storage N3600, you may not include storage expansion units containing

more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3600 system is determined by the

number of disk drives supported. The N3600 Model A10 and Model A20 each

support a maximum of 104 hard disk drives (20 internal and 84 via storage

expansion units).

Table 4 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the

N3600 Model A10 and Model A20:

Table 4. N3600 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

Internal 144 GB SAS

disk drives

n/a 20 2.88 TB

Internal 300 GB SAS

disk drives

n/a 20 6.00 TB

Internal 500 GB SATA

disk drives

n/a 20 10 TB

Internal 750 GB SATA

disk drives

n/a 20 15 TB

Internal 1 TB SATA disk

drives

n/a 20 20 TB

EXN1000 250 GB SATA

disk drives

6 84 21.00 TB

EXN1000 500 GB SATA

disk drives

6 84 42.00 TB

EXN1000 750 GB SATA

disk drives

6 84 63.00 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives

6 84 84 TB

EXN2000 144 GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

6 84 12.09 TB

EXN2000 300 GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

6 84 25.20 TB

EXN4000 144 GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

6 84 12.09 TB

EXN4000 300 GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

6 84 25.20 TB

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with

EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.

12 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 43: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N3600 feature codes

Table 5. N3600 feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

adapter (optical)

2862 A10, A20 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2862 A10, A20 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2862 A10, A20 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape attachment

2862 A10, A20 1015

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2862 A10, A20 1021

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2862 A10, A20 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2862 A10, A20 1026

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2862 A10, A20 1029

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2862 A10, A20 2011

144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4014

300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4015

500 GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4018

750 GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4019

1 TB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4020

HDD Blank Panel 2862 A10, A20 4099

Table 6. N3600 installation features codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2862 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N3600 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list for

N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N3700 hardware features

The N3700 consists of the Model A10 or Model A20, and its associated software.

The Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS, iSCSI

and FCP support in a 3U, integrated filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. This

base chassis includes redundant hot-plug power supplies with fans and two

integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports.

The N3700 Model A10 is capable of being upgraded to an N3700 Model A20. The

Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3700 Model A10, but

with the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The N3700

Model A20 consists of two processing nodes in the same enclosure that are

designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall reliability.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 13

Page 44: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

The N3700 can be configured with as few as four disk drives in the Model A10 and

eight in the Model A20, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (28 disk drives in the

A20). Disk drive types include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000 rpm), 144 GB (10,000 or

15,000 rpm), and 300 GB (10,000 rpm). Within any single N3700, all disk drives

must be of the same type.

Note: Any N3700 drive bays that do not contain hard disk drives must be

populated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining

drive bays.

The N3700 load board feature enables the N3700 (A10 and A20) to operate in a

SATA-only storage environment. If the N3700 load board is ordered, the N3700 is

ordered with no Fibre Channel hard drives and only EXN1000s (SATA drives) are

attached to the storage controller. For more information about the N3700 load

board, see “Connecting expansion units to the N3700” on page 15.

Attention: If your N3700 storage system shipped with load boards, exactly two

N3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099) are installed in

the system. The two load boards must be installed in bays 0 and 1.

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU

modules

N3700 storage systems with system serial numbers between 13-00001 and

13-01000 shipped with an early CPU module design. (In general, these are N3700

systems that shipped prior to January 31, 2006.) Current N3700 systems (with

system serial numbers 13-01001 and higher) ship with the current CPU module

design, which uses different Fibre Channel connectors. (In general, these are

N3700 systems that shipped after January 31, 2006.)

Regardless of the CPU module design, all N3700 storage systems offer the same

functionality. Field repairs or upgrades may use the current CPU module design on

any N3700 system.

The early CPU module is easily distinguished from the current CPU module design

by the rear port labeling, shown in Figure 2. The early CPU module uses an

integrated SFP for Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-party devices), and it uses a

special HSS connector for Fibre Channel Port B to connect the N3700 to expansion

units.

The current CPU module design uses pluggable SFP connections for both Fibre

Channel ports. The current CPU module labeling is shown in Figure 3 on page 15.

The SFP required for connections to the Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-party

devices) is included with all N3700s that ship with the current CPU module design.

Example: No additional disk shelves

Figure 2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs

14 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 45: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

For Port B (used for connections to expansion units), an SFP is required only for

connections using optical cables (recommended). The SFP for Port B is shipped

with the cables ordered with your expansion unit.

Attention: Depending on the design of your N3700 CPU module, direct

connections to expansion units must be made with either Fibre Channel copper

cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in the following bullets:

v For direct connections to N3700 early CPU module designs: Use

NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cables (FC 2020 or 2022). For attachment to

an N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable is required.

For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper

cables are required.

v For direct connections to N3700 current CPU module designs: Use an

LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs for attachment to an N3700

Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs for

attachment to an N3700 Model A20.

Connecting expansion units to the N3700

Physical capacity of the N3700 can be scaled up to 16.8 TB with the attachment of

up to three IBM System Storage N series EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000

expansion units.

v EXN4000 expansion units can be configured with as few as four disk drives, up

to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 144-GB or 300-GB physical

capacity.

v EXN2000 expansion units can be configured with as few as four disk drives, up

to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 72-GB, 144-GB, or 300-GB

physical capacity.

v EXN1000 expansion units can be configured with a minimum of five, up to a

maximum of 14, SATA disk drives of the same capacity. SATA disk drives are

available in 250-GB, 320-GB, 500-GB, 750-GB, and 1-TB capacities.

Note: Any expansion unit drive bays that do not contain hard disk drives must be

populated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining

drive bays.

The N3700 does not support the attachment of mixed expansion unit types. All

expansion units connected to a single N3700 must be either EXN4000s, EXN2000s

or EXN1000s.

Attention: Depending on the CPU module design of your N3700 storage system,

direct connections to expansion units must be made with either Fibre Channel

copper cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in “Understanding the

differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules” on page 14.

C BATerm

On

Off

B

Example: No additional disk shelves

Figure 3. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 15

Page 46: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

The N3700 supports a maximum of three storage expansion units for a total of 56

disk drives (including the possible fourteen disk drives in the N3700) and a

maximum raw physical storage capacity of 16.8 TB. If attaching EXN1000 SATA

storage expansion units to the N3700, the N3700 base unit must either:

v have the minimum number of Fibre Channel disk drives installed (four for a

Model A10 and eight for a Model A20); or

v have two N3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099)

In the case where the objective is to have as much low cost SATA storage as

possible, the N3700 can be configured with no Fibre Channel disk drives. In order

to configure the N3700 system (the base unit and expansion units) with no Fibre

Channel disk drives, you must order two HDD load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD

blank fillers (FC 4099).

Table 7 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the

N3700 Model A10 and Model A20:

Table 7. N3700 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives (including

14 in N3700)

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN4000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

3 56 8 TB

EXN4000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

3 56 16.8 TB

EXN2000 72-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

3 56 4 TB

EXN2000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

3 56 8 TB

EXN2000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

3 56 16.8 TB

EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk

drives

3 56 10.5 TB

1

EXN1000 320-GB SATA disk

drives

3 56 13.44 TB1

EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk

drives

3 56 14 TB1

EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk

drives

3 56 16 TB

1

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives

3 56 16 TB

1

1 This number does not include the fourteen possible Fibre Channel disk drives that can be

installed in the N3700 base unit. When the capacity of the Fibre Channel disk drives in the

base N3700 unit is added to this number, the total capacity must not exceed 16.8 TB.

16 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 47: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N3700 feature codes

Table 8. N3700 feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

72-GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 A10, A20 4000

72-GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 A10, A20 4001

144-GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 A10, A20 4002

144-GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 A10, A20 4003

300-GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 A10, A20 4004

N3700 load board 2863 A10, A20 4020

Drive Blank Cover 2863 A10, A20 4099

Table 9. N3700 installation features codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2863 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N3700 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord

list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5200 filer hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5200 filers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20,

and associated software.

The N5200 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability is

available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N5200 A10

The N5200 Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS,

FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5200 Model A10 does not include storage in the base chassis. The base

chassis includes:

v One Intel® 2.8 GHz Xeon® processor

v 2 GB of ECC memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 17

Page 48: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is

three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channel

storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and

EXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number of dual-path

Fibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk

Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The four onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports

can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage expansion units

(EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre

Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel

SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP targets,

then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004)

are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops

for disk storage expansion units.

The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface

cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the

addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number

1007).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10

to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5200 A20

The N5200 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200 Model

A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover

(CFO) software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are

designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.

Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5200 Model A20 includes:

v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per node

v 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per node

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node

v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be

configured as targets or initiators

v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node

18 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 49: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v Redundant cooling fans

v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node

(always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between

the two processing N5000 nodes

v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is

six.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channel

storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and

EXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number of dual-path

Fibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk

Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre

Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage

expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching

to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre

Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP

targets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC

1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path Fibre Channel storage

loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5200 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet

ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature

number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional

quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N5200 filer

The N5200 filer Models A10 and A20 require at least one storage expansion unit

per node, either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives

must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order

for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different

types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional

expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5200 system varies depending on the

type of disk storage expansion unit (SATA or Fibre Channel) and the capacity of

disk drives used. Table 10 on page 20 describes the maximum supported total

physical storage capacity for both the N5200.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 19

Page 50: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 10. N5200 filer raw storage capacity

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk

drives

12 168 42 TB

EXN1000 320-GB SATA disk

drives

12 168 53.76 TB

EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk

drives

12 168 84 TB

EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk

drives

12 112 84 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives

12 84 84 TB

EXN2000 72-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

12 168 12 TB

EXN2000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

12 168 24 TB

EXN2000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

12 168 50 TB

EXN4000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

12 168 24 TB

EXN4000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

12 168 50 TB

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel

storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six

storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a

single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5200 filer. Dual-path Fibre

Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of

the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant

paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more

information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and

Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5200 filer feature codes

Table 11. N5200 filer feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter

(optical)

2864 A10, A20 1003

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Disk Attachment (filer)

2864 A10, A20 1004

20 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 51: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 11. N5200 filer feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Tape

2864 A10, A20 1005

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Disk Attachment (gateways and

MetroCluster filer configurations)

2864 A20 1006

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2864 A10, A20 1007

Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10

GbE) adapter (optical)

2864 A10, A20 1008

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) 2864 A10, A20 1009

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target

adapter (copper)

2864 A10, A20 1010

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target

adapter (optical)

2864 A10, A20 1011

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD

Tape Adapter

2864 A10, A20 1016

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre

Channel HBA

2864 A20 1018

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

target HBA

2864 A10, A20 1019

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2864 A10, A20 1020

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for Disk

2864 A10, A20 1027

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA

2864 A10, A20 1034

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2864 A20 1042

5m 50-micron MMF Cable1 2864 A10, A20 1045

30m 50-micron MMF Cable1 2864 A10, A20 1046

1 For use with the single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) adapter (optical) (1008).

Table 12. N5200 filer installation features codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2864 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N5200 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord

list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 21

Page 52: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N5200 gateway hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5200 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model

G20, and associated software.

The N5200 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability is

available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the

IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data

ONTAP.

N5200 G10

The N5200 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS,

CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5200 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The

base chassis includes:

v One Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processor

v 2 GB of ECC memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is

three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators

for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel

application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface

22 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 53: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the

addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number

1007).

N5200 G20

The N5200 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200 Model

G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover

(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are

designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable

gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5200 Model G20 includes:

v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per node

v 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per node

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node

v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be

configured as targets or initiators

v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node

v Redundant cooling fans

v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node

(always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between

the two processing N5000 nodes

v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is

six.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators

for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel

application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number

1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-port

copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre

Channel SAN.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 23

Page 54: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N5000 series gateway.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N5200 gateway feature codes

Table 13. N5200 gateway feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter

(optical)

2864 G10, G20 1003

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Tape

2864 G10, G20 1005

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Disk Attachment (gateways and

MetroCluster filer configurations)

2864 G10, G20 1006

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2864 G10, G20 1007

Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10

GbE) (optical)

2864 G10, G20 1008

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) 2864 A10, A20 1009

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter

(copper)

2864 G10, G20 1010

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter

(optical)

2864 G10, G20 1011

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD

Tape Adapter

2864 G10, G20 1016

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre

Channel HBA

2864 G20 1018

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

target HBA

2864 G10, G20 1019

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2864 G10, G20 1020

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA

2864 G10, G20 1034

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2864 G20 1042

5m 50-micron MMF Cable 2864 G10, G20 1045

30m 50-micron MMF Cable 2864 G10, G20 1046

4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2864 G20 1050

1 For use with the single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) adapter (optical) (1008).

24 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 55: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 14. N5200 gateway installation features codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2864 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5200 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power

cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5300 filer hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5300 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and

associated software.

The N5300 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 interoperability is

available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N5300 A10

The N5300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,

FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The

N5300 Model A10 does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base

chassis includes:

v Two 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors

v 4 GB of ECC memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port

v One serial console port

v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the

N5300 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three. A

fourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5300) 512 MB

NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 storage system are described in

Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600

systems,” on page 157.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 25

Page 56: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path Fibre Channel

loops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional Fibre Channel

HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops will support a

maximum of 252 total disk drives.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports via

the addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1022 or

1023).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5300 Model A20. The upgrade from a

Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to an

N5300 storage system.

N5300 A20

The N5300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,

but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)

software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are

designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.

Therefore, the N5300 Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5300 Model A20 includes:

v Four 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors

v 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory

v 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports

v Two serial console ports

v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the

N5300 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is six.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 storage system are described in

Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600

systems,” on page 157.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channel

loops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional Fibre Channel

HBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014). The ten loops will support a

maximum of 252 total disk drives.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the

addition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number

1022 or 1023).

26 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 57: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N5300 filer

Both N5300 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,

either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives

must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order

for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different

types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional

expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum physical storage capacity of the N5300 system varies depending on

the type of disk storage expansion unit (SATA or Fibre Channel) and the capacity of

disk drives used. Table 15 describes the maximum supported total physical storage

capacity for the N5300.

Table 15. N5300 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 84 TB

EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 168 TB

EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 252 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives

24 336 336 TB

EXN2000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 48.384 TB

EXN2000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 100.8 TB

EXN4000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 48.384 TB

EXN4000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 100.8 TB

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel

storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six

storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a

single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5300 filer. Dual-path Fibre

Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of

the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 27

Page 58: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more

information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and

Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5300 filer feature codes

Table 16. N5300 filer feature codes

Feature Code Description Machine Model

Feature

Code

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet

adapter (optical)

2869 A10, A20 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2869 A10, A20 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2869 A10, A20 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape attachment

2869 A10, A20 1015

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

target HBA

2869 A10, A20 1017

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2869 A10, A20 1021

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE

adapter (copper)

2869 A10, A20 1022

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter

(copper)

2869 A10, A20 1023

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2869 A10, A20 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2869 A10, A20 1026

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2869 A10, A20 1029

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet

adapter

2869 A10, A20 1031

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA

(A20/G20 models only)

2869 A20 1032

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA

2869 A10, A20 1033

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape and disk

attachment

2869 A10, A20 1035

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2869 A20 1042

28 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 59: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 17. N5300 filer installation feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2868 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N5300 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord

list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5300 gateway hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5300 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model

G20, and associated software.

The Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS, CIFS, FCP

and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The Model

G20 provides an active/active dual-node base unit.

The N5300 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 gateway

interoperability is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the

IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data

ONTAP.

N5300 Model G10

The N5300 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The

base chassis includes:

v Two AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of level

2 cache

v Four GB random access ECC memory

v Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per node

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion

HBA features)

v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Front LCD message display

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 29

Page 60: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the

N5300 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are

described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and

N5600 systems,” on page 157.

The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10

to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5300 Model G20

The N5300 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5300 Model

G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover

(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are

designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable

gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5300 Model G20 includes:

v Four AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of

level 2 cache

v Eight GB random access ECC memory

v Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loops

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion

HBA features)

v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per

node (always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapter, between

the two processing N5000 nodes

v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximum

number of adapters that may be added to the N5300 Model G20 is six. When

adapter cards are ordered for the Model G20 on the initial order, they must be

ordered and added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with

the same number of each type of PCIe adapters.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are

described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and

N5600 systems,” on page 157.

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

30 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 61: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Connecting a gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre

Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N5000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N5300 gateway feature codes

Table 18. N5300 gateway feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

adapter (optical)

2869 G10, G20 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2869 G10, G20 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA - Disk

2869 G10, G20 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA - Tape

2869 G10, G20 1015

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA-Target

2869 G10, G20 1017

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2869 G10, G20 1021

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE

adapter (copper)

2869 G10, G20 1022

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter

(copper)

2869 G10, G20 1023

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2869 G10, G20 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2869 G10, G20 1026

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2869 G10, G20 1031

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2869 G20 1032

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA

2869 G10, G20 1033

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2869 G20 1042

4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2869 G20 1050

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 31

Page 62: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 19. N5300 gateway installation features codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2869 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5300 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power

cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5500 filer hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5500 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and

associated software.

The N5500 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5500 interoperability is

available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N5500 A10

The N5500 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,

FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The

N5500 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassis

includes:

v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors

v 4 GB of ECC memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Front LCD message display

For the N5500 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is

three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The N5500 Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) Fibre

Channel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000,

and EXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number of

dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre Channel

32 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 63: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre

Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage

expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching

to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre

Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP

targets, then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC

1004) are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channel storage

loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5500 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet

ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network

Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via

the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature

number 1007).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5500 Model A20. The upgrade from a

Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5500 A20

The N5500 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,

but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)

software feature. The N5500 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are

designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.

Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storage

system.

The N5500 Model A20 includes:

v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per node

v 8 GB of ECC memory, 4 GB per node

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node

v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be

configured as targets or initiators

v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node

v Redundant cooling fans

v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node

(always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between

the two processing N5000 nodes

v Front LCD message display

For the N5500 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is

six.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 33

Page 64: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

The N5500 Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) Fibre

Channel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000,

and EXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number of

dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre Channel

HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard

2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching

disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets

for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through

a Fibre Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured

as FCP targets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk

Attachment (FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path Fibre

Channel storage loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5500 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet

ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature

number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional

quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N5500 filer

Both N5500 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,

either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives

must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order

for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different

types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional

expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum physical storage capacity of the N5500 system varies depending on

the type of disk storage expansion unit (SATA or Fibre Channel) and the capacity of

disk drives used. Table 20 describes the maximum supported total physical storage

capacity for the N5500.

Table 20. N5500 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 84 TB

EXN1000 320-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 107.52 TB

EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 168 TB

EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk

drives

24 224 168 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives

24 168 168 TB

34 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 65: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 20. N5500 raw storage capacity (continued)

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN2000 72-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 24 TB

EXN2000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 48 TB

EXN2000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 100.8 TB

EXN4000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 48 TB

EXN4000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 100.8 TB

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel

storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six

storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a

single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5500 filer. Dual-path Fibre

Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of

the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant

paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more

information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and

Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5500 filer feature codes

Table 21. N5500 filer feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter

(optical)

2865 A10, A20 1003

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Disk Attachment (filer)

2865 A10, A20 1004

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Tape

2865 A10, A20 1005

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Disk Attachment (gateways and

MetroCluster filer configurations)

2865 A20 1006

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2865 A10, A20 1007

Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10

GbE) (optical)

2865 A10, A20 1008

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) 2864 A10, A20 1009

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 35

Page 66: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 21. N5500 filer feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target

adapter (copper)

2865 A10, A20 1010

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target

adapter (optical)

2865 A10, A20 1011

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD

Tape Adapter

2865 A10, A20 1016

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre

Channel HBA

2865 A20 1018

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

target HBA

2865 A10, A20 1019

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2865 A10, A20 1020

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for Disk

2865 A10, A20 1027

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA

2865 A10, A20 1034

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2865 A20 1042

5m 50-micron MMF Cable 2865 A10, A20 1045

30m 50-micron MMF Cable 2865 A10, A20 1046

1 For use with the single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) adapter (optical) (1008).

Table 22. N5500 filer installation feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2865 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N5500 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord

list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5500 gateway hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5500 gateways consist of the Model G10 or Model G20,

and associated software.

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the

IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data

ONTAP.

36 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 67: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N5500 G10

The N5500 Model G10 is designed to provide a single-node gateway with NFS,

CIFS, FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch

rack. The N5500 gateway does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This

base chassis includes:

v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors

v 4 GB of ECC memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Front LCD message display

For the N5500 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is

three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators

for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel

application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The N5500 Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000

Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet

Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet

ports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs

(feature number 1007).

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storage

system.

N5500 G20

The N5500 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model G10,

but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)

software feature. The N5500 Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are

designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.

Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5500 Model G20 includes:

v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per node

v 8 GB of ECC memory, 4 GB per node

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 37

Page 68: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be

configured as targets or initiators

v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node

v Redundant cooling fans

v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node

(always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between

the two processing N5000 nodes

v Front LCD message display

For the N5500 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is

six.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems

are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200

and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators

for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel

application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The N5500 Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet

ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature

number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional

quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre

Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N5000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N5500 gateway feature codes

Table 23. N5500 gateway feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter

(optical)

2865 G10, G20 1003

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Tape

2865 G10, G20 1005

38 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 69: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 23. N5500 gateway feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for

Disk Attachment (gateways and

MetroCluster filer configurations)

2865 G10, G20 1006

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2865 G10, G20 1007

Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10

GbE) (optical)

2865 G10, G20 1008

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) 2864 A10, A20 1009

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter

(copper)

2865 G10, G20 1010

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter

(optical)

2865 G10, G20 1011

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD

Tape Adapter

2865 G10, G20 1016

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre

Channel HBA

2865 G20 1018

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

target HBA

2865 G10, G20 1019

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2865 G10, G20 1020

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA

2865 G10, G20 1034

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2865 G20 1042

5m 50-micron MMF Cable 2865 G10, G20 1045

30m 50-micron MMF Cable 2865 G10, G20 1046

4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2865 G20 1050

1 For use with the single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) adapter (optical) (1008).

Table 24. N5500 gateway installation feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2865 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5500 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power

cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5600 filer hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5600 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and

associated software.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 39

Page 70: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

The N5600 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5600 interoperability is

available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N5600 A10

The N5600 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,

FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The

N5600 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassis

includes:

v Two 1.8 GHz 64-bit processors

v 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port

v One serial console port

v Front LCD message display

For the N5600 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is

three. A fourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5600)

512 MB NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5600 storage system are described in

Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600

systems,” on page 157.

The N5600 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path Fibre

Channel loops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional Fibre

Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops will

support a maximum of 420 total disk drives.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports via

the addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1022 or

1023).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5600 Model A20. The upgrade from a

Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to an

N5600 storage system.

40 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 71: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N5600 A20

The N5600 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,

but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)

software feature. The N5600 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are

designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.

Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5600 Model A20 includes:

v Four 1.8 GHz 64-bit processors

v 16 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory

v 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports

v Two serial console ports

v Front LCD message display

For the N5600 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is

six.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5600 storage system are described in

Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600

systems,” on page 157.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channel

loops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional Fibre Channel

HBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014).

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the

addition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number

1022 or 1023).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N5600 filer

Both N5600 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,

either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives

must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order

for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different

types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional

expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 41

Page 72: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

The maximum physical storage capacity of the N5600 system varies depending on

the type of disk storage expansion unit (SATA or Fibre Channel) and the capacity of

disk drives used. The following tables describes the maximum supported total

physical storage capacity for the N5600.

Table 25. N5600 raw storage capacity (without redundant cabling)

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk

drives

36 504 126 TB

EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk

drives

36 504 252 TB

EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk

drives

36 504 378 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives

36 504 504 TB

EXN2000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

36 504 72.57 TB

EXN2000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

36 504 151.2 TB

EXN4000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

36 504 72.57 TB

EXN4000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

36 504 151.2 TB

Table 26. N5600 raw storage capacity (with redundant cabling)

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 84 TB

EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 168 TB

EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk

drives

24 336 252 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives

24 336 336 TB

EXN2000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 48.38 TB

EXN2000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 100.8 TB

EXN4000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 48.38 TB

42 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 73: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 26. N5600 raw storage capacity (with redundant cabling) (continued)

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN4000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

24 336 100.8 TB

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel

storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six

storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a

single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5600 filer. Dual-path Fibre

Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of

the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant

paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more

information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and

Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5600 filer feature codes

Table 27. N5600 filer feature codes

Feature Code Description Machine Model

Feature

Code

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet

adapter (optical)

2868 A10, A20 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2868 A10, A20 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2868 A10, A20 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape attachment

2868 A10, A20 1015

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

target HBA

2868 A10, A20 1017

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2868 A10, A20 1021

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE

adapter (copper)

2868 A10, A20 1022

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter

(copper)

2868 A10, A20 1023

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2869 A10, A20 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2868 A10, A20 1026

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2868 A10, A20 1029

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet

adapter

2868 A10, A20 1031

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA

(A20/G20 models only)

2868 A20 1032

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 43

Page 74: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 27. N5600 filer feature codes (continued)

Feature Code Description Machine Model

Feature

Code

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA

2868 A10, A20 1033

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape and disk

attachment

2868 A10, A20 1035

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2868 A20 1042

Table 28. N5600 filer installation feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2868 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N5600 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord

list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5600 gateway hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5600 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model

G20, and associated software.

The N5600 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS,

CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5600 Model G20 provides an active/active dual-node base unit.

The N5600 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. The most current information on N5600 gateway interoperability

is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the

IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data

ONTAP.

N5600 Model G10

The N5600 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The

base chassis includes:

v Two AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache

44 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 75: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v 8 GB of DDR-400 memory

v Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per node

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v 504 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion

HBA features)

v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the

N5600 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are

described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and

N5600 systems,” on page 157.

The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10

to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5600 Model G20

The N5600 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5600 Model

G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover

(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are

designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall

availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable

gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5600 Model G20 includes:

v Four AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache

v 16 GB of DDR-400 memory

v Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loops

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v 504 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (20 with the addition of expansion

HBA features)

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per

node (always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapter, between

the two processing N5000 nodes

v Front LCD message display

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 45

Page 76: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximum

number of adapters that may be added to the Model G20 is six. When adapter

cards are ordered for Model G20 on the initial order, they must be ordered and

added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same

number of each type of PCIe adapters.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are

described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and

N5600 systems,” on page 157.

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre

Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N5000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N5600 gateway feature codes

Table 29. N5600 gateway feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

adapter (optical)

2868 G10, G20 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2868 G10, G20 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA - Disk

2868 G10, G20 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA - Tape

2868 G10, G20 1015

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA - Target

2868 G10, G20 1017

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2868 G10, G20 1021

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE

adapter (copper)

2868 G10, G20 1022

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter

(copper)

2868 G10, G20 1023

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2868 G10, G20 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2868 G10, G20 1026

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2868 G10, G20 1031

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2868 G20 1032

46 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 77: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 29. N5600 gateway feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA

2868 G10, G20 1033

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2868 G20 1042

4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2864 G20 1050

Table 30. N5600 gateway installation features codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Field install rack mount kit 2868 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5600 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power

cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N7700 filer hardware features

The N7700 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and

associated software.

The IBM System Storage N7700 storage controllers are designed to interoperate

with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,

FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS

only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N7000 series filer system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N7700 A11

The N7700 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with

iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7700

is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The

N7700 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base

chassis includes:

v Two AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2

cache

v 16 GB of DDR-333 memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 47

Page 78: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots

v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One

PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)

v One serial console port

For the N7700 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters

is eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for the

standard (included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage

systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by

N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

The N7700 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and

loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of

four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,

1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 840 total disk drives. The

Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the

addition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards

(NICs) (feature number 1009).

The Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11

to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N7700 A21

The N7700 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7700 Model

A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover

(CFO) licensed function. The N7700 Model A21 supports a maximum of 840 drives,

32 GB of DDR-333 memory, and ten backend Fibre Channel loops. The Model A21

consists of two nodes that are designed to provide failover and failback function,

helping improve overall availability. For the Model A21, each node is a 6U

rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a total of 12U

of rack space.

The Model A21 includes:

v Four AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2

cache

v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory

v 1 GB of NVRAM

v 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Six PCI-X expansion slots

v 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. Two

PCIe slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.)

v Two serial console ports

For the N7700 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters

is 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard

(included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter cards.

48 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 79: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage

systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by

N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

The N7700 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and

loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of two

optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014, 1029, or

1035).

The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the

addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number

1009).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N7700 filer

Both N7700 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,

either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives

must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order

for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different

types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional

expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7700 system is determined only by the

number of disk drives supported.

Table 31 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the

N7700.

Table 31. N7700 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk

drives

84 840 210 TB

EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk

drives

84 840 420 TB

EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk

drives

84 840 630 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives1

84 840 840 TB

EXN2000 72-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 840 60.48 TB

EXN2000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 840 120.96 TB

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 49

Page 80: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 31. N7700 raw storage capacity (continued)

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN2000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 840 252 TB

EXN4000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 840 120.96 TB

EXN4000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 840 252 TB

1 The 1 TB SATA disk drive requires Data ONTAP 7.2.4 or later.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel

storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six

storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a

single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7700 filer. Dual-path Fibre

Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of

the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant

paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more

information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and

Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N7700 filer feature codes

Table 32. N7700 filer feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10

GbE) TOE (optical)

2866 A11, A21 1008

Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

TOE (copper)

2866 A11, A21 1009

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

iSCSI Target adapter (copper)

2866 A11, A21 1010

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

iSCSI Target adapter (optical)

2866 A11, A21 1011

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter

(optical)

2866 A11, A21 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2866 A11, A21 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2866 A11, A21 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape attachment

2866 A11, A21 1015

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel Tape

adapter

2866 A11, A21 1016

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

Target HBA

2866 A11, A21 1017

50 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 81: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 32. N7700 filer feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2866 A11, A21 1021

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE

adapter (copper)

2866 A11, A21 1022

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter

(copper)

2866 A11, A21 1023

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2866 A11, A21 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2866 A11, A21 1026

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2866 A11, A21 1029

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2866 A11, A21 1031

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2866 A21 1032

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA (PCIe)

2866 A11, A21 1033

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA (PCI-X)

2866 A11, A21 1034

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape and disk attachment

2866 A11, A21 1035

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1041

Copper-fiber converter 2866 A21 1042

5m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 A21 1045

30m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 A21 1046

30m 50-micron MMF cable

(LC/SC)1

2866 A21 1047

5m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 2866 A21 1048

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2866 A21 1050

1 For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.

Table 33. N7700 filer installation feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Plant install in 2101 rack 2866 A11, A21 9201

Field install rack mount kit 2866 A11, A21 9202

The power cord features for the N7700 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord

list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 51

Page 82: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N7700 gateway hardware features

The IBM System Storage N7700 gateways consist of the Model G11 or Model G21,

and associated software. Both N7700 gateway models require an existing external

storage infrastructure that can be heterogeneous. EXN expansion units may not be

attached to the N7700 gateways.

The N7700 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. The most current information on N7700 gateway interoperability

is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the

IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data

ONTAP.

N7700 Model G11

The N7700 G11 is a 6U gateway that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis

includes:

v Two AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2

cache

v 16 GB of DDR-333 memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots

v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One

PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)

Note: The PCI adapters supported by the N7700 gateway are described in

Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,”

on page 163.

v One serial console port

v Support for a maximum of 840 LUNs

The Model G11 may be upgraded to a Model G21. The upgrade from a Model G11

to a Model G21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N7700 Model G21

The N7700 Model G21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7700 Model

G11, but with the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) function. The N7700

Model G21 consists of two active/active processing nodes that are designed to

provide a high-availability environment, helping improve overall reliability. For the

52 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 83: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Model G21, each processing node is a 6U rack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the

Model G21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space.

The base chassis includes:

v Four AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2

cache

v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Twelve integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Sixteen integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports (32 with the addition of expansion

HBA adapters)

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Six PCI-X expansion slots (thee per node)

v Twelve PCIe expansion slots (six per node). On each node, five PCIe slots are

available for customer use and one PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6

adapter.

Note: The adapters supported by the N7700 gateway are described in

Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,”

on page 163.

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapters and

connects the two processing nodes

v Two serial console ports

v Support for a maximum of 840 LUNs

When adapter cards are ordered for the Model G21, they must be ordered and

added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same

number of each type of PCI-X/PCIe adapters.

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G21 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre

Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N7000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N7700 gateway feature codes

Table 34. N7700 gateway feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10

GbE) TOE (optical)

2866 G11, G21 1008

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 53

Page 84: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 34. N7700 gateway feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

TOE (copper)

2866 G11, G21 1009

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

iSCSI Target adapter (copper)

2866 G11, G21 1010

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

iSCSI Target adapter (optical)

2866 G11, G21 1011

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter

(optical)

2866 G11, G21 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2866 G11, G21 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2866 G11, G21 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape attachment

2866 G11, G21 1015

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel Tape

adapter

2866 G11, G21 1016

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

Target HBA

2866 G11, G21 1017

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2866 G11, G21 1021

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE

adapter (copper)

2866 G11, G21 1022

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter

(copper)

2866 G11, G21 1023

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2866 G11, G21 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2866 G11, G21 1026

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2866 G11, G21 1029

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2866 G11, G21 1031

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2866 G21 1032

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA PCIe

2866 G11, G21 1033

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA (PCI-X)

2866 G11, G21 1034

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape and disk attachment

2866 G11, G21 1035

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2866 G21 1042

5m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 G21 1045

54 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 85: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 34. N7700 gateway feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

30m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 G21 1046

30m 50-micron MMF cable

(LC/SC)1

2866 G21 1047

5m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 2866 G21 1048

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2866 G21 1050

1 For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.

Table 35. N7700 gateway installation feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Plant install in 2101 rack 2866 G11, G21 9201

Field install rack mount kit 2866 G11, G21 9202

The power cord features for the N7700 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power

cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N7900 filer hardware features

The N7900 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and

associated software. The IBM System Storage N7900 storage controllers are

designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the

industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM

Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only)

servers.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N7000 series filer system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N7900 A11

The N7900 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with

iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7900

Model A11 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch

rack. The N7900 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis.

The base chassis includes:

v Four AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of

level 2 cache

v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory

v 2 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 55

Page 86: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One

PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)

v One serial console port

For the N7900 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters

is eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for the

standard (included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage

systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by

N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

The N7900 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 multi-path (loop A and

loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of

four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,

1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 1176 total disk drives. The

Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the

addition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards

(NICs) (feature number 1009).

The Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11

to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N7900 A21

The N7900 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7900 Model

A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover

(CFO) licensed function. The N7900 Model A21 also supports a maximum of 1176

drives and 14 backend Fibre Channel loops.

The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed to provide failover and

failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A21, each node

is a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a

total of 12U of rack space.

The N7900 Model A21 includes:

v Eight AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of

level 2 cache

v 64 GB of DDR-333 memory

v 4 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Six PCI-X expansion slots

v 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. Two

PCIe slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.)

v Two serial console ports

For the N7900 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters

is 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard

(included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter cards.

56 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 87: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage

systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by

N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

The N7900 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and

loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of

four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,

1029, or 1035). The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit

Ethernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet

NICs (feature number 1009).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N7900 filer

Both N7900 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,

either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives

must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order

for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different

types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional

expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 system is determined only by the

number of disk drives supported.

Table 36 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the

N7900.

Table 36. N7900 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk

drives

84 1176 294 TB

EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk

drives

84 1176 588 TB

EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk

drives

84 1176 882 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk

drives1

84 1176 1176 TB

EXN2000 72-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 1176 82.67 TB

EXN2000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 1176 169.34 TB

EXN2000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 1176 352.80 TB

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 57

Page 88: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 36. N7900 raw storage capacity (continued)

Disk enclosure

Disk drive

capacity

Maximum

storage

enclosures

Maximum disk

drives

Maximum

physical

capacity

EXN4000 144-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 1176 169.34 TB

EXN4000 300-GB Fibre

Channel disk

drives

84 1176 352.80 TB

1 1 TB SATA disk drives require Data ONTAP 7.2.4 or later.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel

storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six

storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a

single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7900 filer. Dual-path Fibre

Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of

the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant

paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more

information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and

Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N7900 filer feature codes

Table 37. N7900 filer feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10

GbE) TOE (optical)

2867 A11, A21 1008

Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

TOE (copper)

2867 A11, A21 1009

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

iSCSI Target adapter (copper)

2867 A11, A21 1010

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

iSCSI Target adapter (optical)

2867 A11, A21 1011

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter

(optical)

2867 A11, A21 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2867 A11, A21 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2867 A11, A21 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape attachment

2867 A11, A21 1015

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel Tape

adapter

2867 A11, A21 1016

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

Target HBA

2867 A11, A21 1017

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2867 A11, A21 1021

58 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 89: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 37. N7900 filer feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE

adapter (copper)

2867 A11, A21 1022

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter

(copper)

2867 A11, A21 1023

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2867 A11, A21 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2867 A11, A21 1026

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2867 A11, A21 1029

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2867 A11, A21 1031

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2867 A21 1032

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA (PCIe)

2867 A11, A21 1033

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA (PCI-X)

2867 A11, A21 1034

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape and disk attachment

2867 A11, A21 1035

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2867 A21 1042

5m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 A21 1045

30m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 A21 1046

30m 50-micron MMF cable

(LC/SC)1

2867 A21 1047

5m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 2867 A21 1048

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2867 A21 1050

1 For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.

Table 38. N7900 filer installation feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Plant install in 2101 rack 2867 A11, A21 9201

Field install rack mount kit 2867 A11, A21 9202

The power cord features for the N7900 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord

list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 59

Page 90: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N7900 gateway hardware features

The IBM System Storage N7900 gateways consist of the Model G11 or Model G21,

and associated software. Both N7900 gateway models require an existing external

storage infrastructure that can be heterogeneous. EXN expansion units may not be

attached to the N7900 gateways.

The N7900 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data

transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These

include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z

(NFS only) servers. The most current information on N7900 gateway interoperability

is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,

see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the

IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data

ONTAP.

N7900 Model G11

The N7900 Model G11 is designed to provide a single-node gateway with iSCSI

support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7900 is a 6U

gateway that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7900 gateway

does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes:

v Four AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of

level 2 cache

v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory

v 2 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports (16 with the addition of expansion

HBA features)

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel HBAs or Gigabit

Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One

PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)

Note: The PCI adapters supported by the N7900 gateway are described in

Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,”

on page 163.

v Support for a maximum of 1176 LUNs

v One serial console port

The N7900 Model G11 is capable of being upgraded to an N7900 Model G21. The

upgrade from a Model G11 to a Model G21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N7900 Model G21

The N7900 Model G21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7900 Model

G11, but with the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) function. The N7900

60 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 91: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Model G21 consists of two active/active processing nodes that are designed to

provide a high-availability environment, helping improve overall reliability. For the

Model G21, each processing node is a 6U rack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the

Model G21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space.

The base chassis includes:

v Eight AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of

level 2 cache

v 64 GB of DDR-333 memory

v 4 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Twelve integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Sixteen integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports (32 with the addition of expansion

HBA adapters)

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Six PCI-X expansion slots (thee per node)

v Twelve PCIe expansion slots (six per node). On each node, five PCIe slots are

available for customer use and one PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6

adapter.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N7700 gateway are described in

Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,”

on page 163.

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapters and

connects the two processing nodes

v Two serial console ports

v Support for a maximum of 1176 LUNs

When adapter cards are ordered for the Model G21, they must be ordered and

added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same

number of each type of PCI-X/PCIe adapters.

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G21 (with

respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables

are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables

(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre

Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N7000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 61

Page 92: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N7900 gateway feature codes

Table 39. N7900 gateway feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10

GbE) TOE (optical)

2867 G11, G21 1008

Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

TOE (copper)

2867 G11, G21 1009

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

iSCSI Target adapter (copper)

2867 G11, G21 1010

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

iSCSI Target adapter (optical)

2867 G11, G21 1011

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter

(optical)

2867 G11, G21 1012

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet

adapter (copper)

2867 G11, G21 1013

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2867 G11, G21 1014

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape attachment

2867 G11, G21 1015

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel Tape

adapter

2867 G11, G21 1016

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

Target HBA

2867 G11, G21 1017

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter

(optical)

2867 G11, G21 1021

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE

adapter (copper)

2867 G11, G21 1022

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter

(copper)

2867 G11, G21 1023

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for

tape attachment

2867 G11, G21 1024

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI

Target Adapter (copper)

2867 G11, G21 1026

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for disk attachment

2867 G11, G21 1029

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2867 G11, G21 1031

Dual-port Metrocluster VI HBA 2867 G21 1032

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA (PCIe)

2867 G11, G21 1033

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel

HBA (PCI-X)

2867 G11, G21 1034

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

HBA for tape and disk attachment

2867 G11, G21 1035

2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1037

5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1038

10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1040

62 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 93: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 39. N7900 gateway feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1041

Copper-Fiber Converter 2867 G21 1042

5m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 G21 1045

30m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 G21 1046

30m 50-micron MMF cable

(LC/SC)1

2867 G21 1047

5m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 2867 G21 1048

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2867 G21 1050

1 For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.

Table 40. N7900 gateway installation feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Plant install in 2101 rack 2867 G11, G21 9201

Field install rack mount kit 2867 G11, G21 9202

The power cord features for the N7900 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power

cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI

The following sections describes the configuration limits for Fibre Channel and

iSCSI for all N series systems.

v “Host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI and Fibre Channel” on page

65

v “Configuration limits for single-controller N7000 series and N5000 series storage

systems” on page 65

v “Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series storage

systems” on page 66

v “Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems” on page 67

v “Configuration limits for active/active N3300 and N3600 systems” on page 68

v “Configuration limits for single controller N3700 systems” on page 68

v “Configuration limits for active/active N3700 systems” on page 69

The following list provides parameters and definitions for Fibre Channel and iSCSI

configuration limits described in the following sections.

Visible target ports per host (iSCSI)

The maximum number of target iSCSI Ethernet ports a host can see or

access on iSCSI attached controllers.

Visible target ports per host (Fibre Channel)

The maximum number of Fibre Channel adapters a host can see or access

on the attached Fibre Channel controllers.

LUNs per host

The maximum number of LUNs that can be mapped from the controllers to

a single host.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 63

Page 94: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Paths per LUN

The maximum number of accessible paths that a host has to a LUN.

Maximum LUN size

The maximum size of an individual LUN on the respective operating

system.

LUNs per controller

The maximum number of LUNs that can be configured per controller,

including cloned LUNs and LUNs contained within cloned volumes. LUNs

contained in Snapshot copies do not count in this limit and there is no limit

on the number of LUNs that can be contained within Snapshot copies.

LUNs per volume

The maximum number of LUNs that can be configured within a single

volume. LUNs contained in Snapshots do not count in this limit and there is

no limit on the number of LUNs that can be contained within Snapshot

copies.

Fibre Channel port fan-in

The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a single Fibre Channel

adapter on a controller. Connecting the maximum number of hosts is

generally not recommended and tuning the Fibre Channel queue depths on

the host is necessary to achieve this maximum value.

Fibre Channel port fan-out

The number of LUNs mapped to a host through a Fibre Channel target port

on a controller.

Hosts per controller (iSCSI)

The recommended maximum number of iSCSI hosts that can be connected

to a single controller. The general formula to calculate this is:

Maximum hosts = 8 * System Memory/ 512MB

Hosts per controller (Fibre Channel)

The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a controller. Connecting

the maximum number of hosts is generally not recommended and tuning

the Fibre Channel queue depths on the host is necessary to achieve this

maximum value.

igroups per controller

Maximum number of initiator groups that can be configured per controller.

Number of initiators per igroup

Maximum number of Fibre Channel initiators (HBA WWNs) or iSCSI

initiators (host iqn/eui nodenames) that can be included in a single igroup.

Number of LUN mappings per controller

Maximum number of LUN mappings per controller. For example, a LUN

mapped to two igroups counts as two mappings.

Length of LUN path name

The maximum number of characters in a full LUN name. For example,

/vol/abc/def has 12 characters.

LUN size

The maximum capacity of an individual LUN on a controller.

Fibre Channel queue depth available per port

The usable queue depth capacity of each Fibre Channel Target port.

Fibre Channel target ports per controller

The maximum number of supported Fibre Channel adapters per controller.

64 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 95: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Fibre Channel initiator adapters used for back-end disk connections (for

example, connections to disk shelves) are not included in this number.

Host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI and Fibre

Channel

Table 41 shows host-based configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI for their

respective host operating systems.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have

been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.

Table 41. Host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI and Fibre Channel

Parameter

Operating system

Windows Linux® HP-UX Solaris AIX® VMware

Visible target

ports per host

16 16 16 16 16 16

LUNs per host v 64

(Windows

2000)

v 128

(Windows

2003)

128 512 512 128 v 2.x=128

v 3.x=256

Paths per LUN 8 4 8 more

possible, but

pvlinks will only

utilize 8

16 16 v 2.x=4

v 3.x=8

Max LUN size

Note: The

maximum LUN

sizes are due

to restrictions

at the

operating

system level,

not the storage

system level.

v 2 TB

v 12 TB

(Windows

2003 or later

2 TB 2 TB v 1023 GB

v 12 TB with

Solaris 9,

VxVM, EFI,

and

appropriate

patches

v 1 TB

v 12 TB with

AIX 5.2ML7

or later and

AIX 5.3ML3

or later

2 TB

Configuration limits for single-controller N7000 series and N5000

series storage systems

Table 42 on page 66 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for

individual system models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have

been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 65

Page 96: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 42. Configuration limits for single-controller N7000 series and N5000 series storage

systems

Parameter

Storage system

N5200

A10/G10

N5500

A10/G10

N5300 and

N5600

A10/G10

N7700

A11/G11

N7900

A11/G11

Maximum number of LUNs

per controller

1024 1024 2048 2048 2048

Maximum number of LUNs

per volume

1024 1024 2048 2048 2048

Maximum port fan-in 64 64 64 64 64

Maximum connected hosts

per storage controller (Fibre

Channel)

256 256 256 256 256

Maximum connected hosts

per controller (iSCSI)

64 128 256 256 512

Maximum number of

igroups per controller

256 256 256 256 256

Maximum number of

initiators per igroup

256 256 256 256 256

Maximum number of LUN

mappings per controller

4096 4096 4096 8192 8192

Maximum length of LUN

path name

255 255 255 255 255

Maximum LUN Size 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB

Maximum Fibre Channel

Queue Depth available per

port

1720 1720 1720 1720 1720

Maximum Fibre Channel

target ports per controller

4 4 4 8 8

Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series

storage systems

Table 43 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for individual system

models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have

been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.

Table 43. Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series storage

systems

Parameter

Storage system

N5200

A20/G20

N5500

A20/G20

N5300 and

N5600

A20/G20

N7700

A21/G21

N7900

A21/G21

Maximum number of LUNs

per controller

1024 1024 2048 2048 2048

Maximum number of LUNs

per volume

1024 1024 2048 2048 2048

66 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 97: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 43. Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series storage

systems (continued)

Parameter

Storage system

N5200

A20/G20

N5500

A20/G20

N5300 and

N5600

A20/G20

N7700

A21/G21

N7900

A21/G21

Maximum port fan-in 64 64 64 64 64

Maximum connected hosts

per active/active

configuration (Fibre

Channel)

256 256 256 256 256

Maximum connected hosts

per active/active

configuration (iSCSI)

128 256 512 512 1024

Maximum number of

igroups per active/active

configuration

256 256 256 256 256

Maximum number of

initiators per igroup

256 256 256 256 256

Maximum number of LUN

mappings per active/active

configuration

4096 4096 4096 8192 8192

Maximum length of LUN

path name

255 255 255 255 255

Maximum LUN Size 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB

Maximum Fibre Channel

Queue Depth available per

port

1720 1720 1720 1720 1720

Maximum Fibre Channel

target ports per active/active

configuration

8 8 8 16 16

Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems

Table 44 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for individual system

models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have

been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.

Table 44. Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems

Parameter

Storage system

N3300 A10 N3600 A10

Maximum number of LUNs per controller 1024 1024

Maximum number of LUNs per volume 1024 1024

Maximum port fan-in 16 16

Maximum connected hosts per controller (Fibre

Channel)

24 32

Maximum connected hosts per controller (iSCSI) 24 32

Maximum number of igroups per controller 256 256

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 67

Page 98: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 44. Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems (continued)

Parameter

Storage system

N3300 A10 N3600 A10

Maximum number of initiators per igroup 256 256

Maximum number of LUN mappings per

controller

4096 4096

Maximum length of LUN path name 255 255

Maximum LUN Size 12 TB 12 TB

Maximum Fibre Channel Queue Depth available

per port

737 737

Maximum Fibre Channel target ports per

controller

2 2

Configuration limits for active/active N3300 and N3600 systems

Table 45 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for individual system

models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have

been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.

Table 45. Configuration limits for active/active N3300 and N3600 systems

Parameter

Storage system

N3300 A20 N3600 A20

Maximum number of LUNs per active/active

storage system

1024 1024

Maximum number of LUNs per volume 1024 1024

Maximum port fan-in 16 16

Maximum connected hosts per active/active

configuration (Fibre Channel)

24 32

Maximum connected hosts per active/active

configuration (iSCSI)

24 32

Maximum number of igroups per active/active

configuration

256 256

Maximum number of initiators per igroup 256 256

Maximum number of LUN mappings per

active/active configuration

4096 4096

Maximum length of LUN path name 255 255

Maximum LUN Size 12 TB 12 TB

Maximum Fibre Channel Queue Depth available

per port

737 737

Maximum Fibre Channel target ports per

active/active configuration

4 4

Configuration limits for single controller N3700 systems

Table 46 on page 69 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for

individual system models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

68 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 99: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have

been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.

Table 46. Configuration limits for single controller N3700 systems

Parameter

Storage system

N3700 A10

Maximum number of LUNs per controller 1024

Maximum number of LUNs per volume 1024

Maximum port fan-in 16

Maximum connected hosts per controller (Fibre Channel) 16

Maximum connected hosts per controller (iSCSI) 8

Maximum number of igroups per controller 256

Maximum number of initiators per igroup 256

Maximum number of LUN mappings per controller 4096

Maximum length of LUN path name 255

Maximum LUN Size 6 TB

Maximum Fibre Channel Queue Depth available per port 491

Maximum Fibre Channel target ports per controller 1

Configuration limits for active/active N3700 systems

Table 47 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for individual system

models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have

been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.

Table 47. Configuration limits for active/active N3700 systems

Parameter

Storage system

N3700 A20

Maximum number of LUNs per active/active storage system 1024

Maximum number of LUNs per volume 1024

Maximum port fan-in 16

Maximum connected hosts per active/active storage system

(Fibre Channel)

16

Maximum connected hosts per active/active storage system

(iSCSI)

32

Maximum number of igroups per active/active storage system 256

Maximum number of initiators per igroup 256

Maximum number of LUN mappings per controller 4096

Maximum length of LUN path name 255

Maximum LUN Size 6 TB

Maximum Fibre Channel Queue Depth available per port 491

Maximum Fibre Channel target ports per active/active storage

system

2

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 69

Page 100: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

EXN1000 expansion unit hardware features

The IBM System Storage EXN1000 SATA expansion unit is a SATA disk storage

device for IBM System Storage N series filer storage systems. The EXN1000 3U

disk storage expansion unit may be mounted in any industry-standard 19-inch rack.

The EXN1000 contains:

v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supples and cooling fans

v Dual redundant disk expansion unit switched controllers

v Fourteen hard disk drive bays.

The EXN1000 SATA expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of five SATA disk

drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same capacity), in 250-GB,

320-GB, 500-GB, 750-GB, or 1 TB physical capacities.

v With 250-GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 3.5

TB of physical storage capacity.

v With 320-GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 4.48

TB of physical storage capacity.

v With 500-GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 7

TB of physical storage capacity.

v With 750-GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 10.5

TB of physical storage capacity.

v With 1 TB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 14 TB

of physical storage capacity.

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least five of the drives must

be installed in the EXN1000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)

covering the remaining drive bays.

Attention: 320-GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000s

when used in N7700 and N7900 filer configurations.

EXN1000 feature codes

Table 48 lists the feature codes for the EXN1000.

Table 48. EXN1000 feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

SFP GBIC 2861 001 2010

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable

0.5 m

1

2861 001 2020

Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2861 001 2021

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable

3.0 m

1

2861 001 2022

Fibre Channel Copper Cable 3.0 m 2861 001 2023

1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2861 001 2042

2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2861 001 2043

5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2861 001 2044

250-GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4010

320-GB SATA Drive

2 2861 001 4011

500-GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4012

70 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 101: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 48. EXN1000 feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

750-GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4013

1-TB SATA Drive 2861 001 4016

HDD Blank Panel 2861 001 4099

1 Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connections

to expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs. For more

information, see “Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU

modules” on page 14.2 320-GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000s when used in

N7700 and N7900 filer configurations.

The power cord features for the EXN1000 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list

for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

EXN2000 expansion unit hardware features

The IBM System Storage EXN2000 Fibre Channel expansion unit is a Fibre

Channel disk storage device for the IBM System Storage N series filer storage

systems. Physical capacity can be scaled up to 4.2 TB for each EXN2000 added to

an N series filer (assuming the EXN2000 is populated with 14 300-GB HDDs).

The EXN2000 contains:

v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Dual redundant disk expansion unit switched controllers

v Fourteen hard disk drive bays

The EXN2000 Fibre Channel expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of four

Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same

capacity). Disk drive options for the EXN2000 include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000

rpm), 144 GB (10,000 or 15,000 rpm), and 300 GB (10,000 rpm).

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drives must

be installed in the EXN2000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)

covering the remaining drive bays.

EXN2000 feature codes

Table 49 lists the feature codes for the EXN2000.

Table 49. EXN2000 feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

SFP GBIC 2863 001 2010

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable

0.5 m

2863 001 20201

Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2863 001 2021

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable

3.0 m

2863 001 20221

Fibre Channel Copper Cable 3.0 m 2863 001 2023

1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 001 2042

2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 001 2043

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 71

Page 102: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 49. EXN2000 feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature

5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 001 2044

72 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 001 4000

72 GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 001 4001

144 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 001 4002

144 GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 001 4003

300 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 001 4004

HDD Blank Panel 2863 001 4099

1 Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connections

to expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs. For more

information, see “Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU

modules” on page 14.

The power cord features for the EXN2000 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list

for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

EXN4000 expansion unit hardware features

The IBM System Storage EXN4000 Fibre Channel expansion unit is a Fibre

Channel disk storage device for the IBM System Storage N series filer storage

systems. Physical capacity can be scaled up to 4.2 TB for each EXN4000 added to

an N series filer (assuming the EXN4000 is populated with fourteen 300-GB HDDs).

The EXN4000 is designed to provide 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, and 4-Gbps Fibre Channel

disk expansion for the IBM System Storage N series storage controllers. EXN4000s

attached to a 2-Gbps loop must be manually configured for 2-Gbps speed.

Note: The EXN4000 4-Gbps support requires that the N series filer be running

Data ONTAP 7.2.1 or later.

The EXN4000 contains:

v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Dual redundant disk expansion unit switched controllers

v Fourteen hard disk drive bays

The EXN4000 Fibre Channel expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of four

Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same

capacity). Disk drive options for the EXN4000 include 144 GB (10,000 or 15,000

rpm) and 300 GB (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm).

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drives must

be installed in the EXN4000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)

covering the remaining drive bays.

72 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 103: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

EXN4000 feature codes

Table 50 lists the feature codes for the EXN4000.

Table 50. EXN4000 feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2863 004 2011

Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2863 004 2021

Fibre Channel Copper Cable 3.0 m 2863 004 2023

1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 004 2042

2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 004 2043

5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 004 2044

144 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 004 4002

144 GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 004 4003

300 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel

HDD

2863 004 4004

300 GB 4-Gbps 15K RPM Fibre

Channel HDD

2863 004 4006

HDD Blank Panel 2863 004 4099

The power cord features for the EXN4000 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list

for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Rack mount requirements

N series storage systems and expansion units should be rack-mounted. N series

storage systems and expansion units include a mounting rail kit. The recommended

racks are:

v IBM 7014 Model T00, which is a 36U high rack

v IBM 7014 Model T42, which is a 42U high rack

v IBM 2101 Model N00 rack, which is a 36U high rack

Other racks may be used, provided they allow the clearances specified in

Appendix D, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 133. N series

storage systems and expansion units do not mount in all IBM racks. It is important

to check clearances when using any rack other than the IBM 7014 or IBM 2101.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 73

Page 104: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

74 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 105: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features

The operating system for the IBM NAS N series products is the NetApp Data

ONTAP software. It is a highly optimized, scalable and flexible operating system

that can handle heterogeneous environments. It integrates into UNIX, Windows, and

Web environments.

Data ONTAP characteristics include:

v Flexible volumes that do not require prepartitioning

v Usage of multiple processors for performance

v Block-level data access over Fibre Channel SAN fabric using FCP and over

IP-based Ethernet network using iSCSI

v File-level data access over an IP-based Ethernet network using file access

protocols such as NFS, CIFS, HTTP, or FTP

v Data protection and recovery

v Disk-based data permanence features for regulated and reference data

v Double parity RAID

v Setup wizard

v FilerView™, a web-based administration tool that allows IT administrators to fully

manage N series systems from remote locations. FilerView is a simple and

intuitive web-based single-appliance administration.

v SnapShot™, which enables instant self-service file backup and recovery for end

users. Only block level changes are stored, so only a minimal amount of space is

required for each subsequent snapshot.

v FlexVol™, which allows an administrator to create multiple flexible volumes across

a large pool of disks. This feature enables dynamic, non-disruptive storage (thin)

provisioning and increases space- and time-efficiency. FlexVol enables more

productive use of available storage and helps improve performance.

Following are descriptions of the supported software protocols for the N series

storage system.

CIFS CIFS allows Microsoft® Windows servers and clients access over the IP

network using CIFS file system protocols. Microsoft Windows client access

licenses (CALs) are not required.

CIFS supports an active directory environment.

To enable CIFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code.

See “IBM N series host software features” on page 83.

NFS NFS allows UNIX and Linux servers and clients access over an IP network

using NFS file system protocols.

To enable NFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code.

See “IBM N series host software features” on page 83.

iSCSI iSCSI allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/O

formats (iSCSI protocol) across an IP network. iSCSI enables the creation

of IP SANs for optimizing the transfer of database traffic in IP environments.

To enable iSCSI, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See

“IBM N series host software features” on page 83.

FCP FCP allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/O

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 75

Page 106: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

formats utilizing FCP protocols across a Fibre Channel SAN. FCP enables

participation of an N series storage solution within Fibre Channel SAN

environments.

To enable FCP, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See “IBM

N series host software features” on page 83.

Following are descriptions of some of the Data ONTAP software packages available

for the N series storage system as feature codes.

Advanced Single Instance Storage

This feature provides block-level deduplication within the entire flexible

volume on an IBM N series storage controller that has the near-line

Function feature enabled. Advanced Single Instance Storage only stores

unique data blocks in the flexible volume and creates a small amount of

additional metadata in the process. Each block of data has a digital

″signature,″ that is compared to all other signatures in the flexible volume. If

an exact byte-for-byte block match exists on the flexible volume, the

duplicate block is discarded and its disk space is reclaimed.

CFO Installed on a pair of N series storage controllers, this feature is designed to

enable the transfer of data service from an unavailable controller to the

other controller in the cluster. It is designed to deliver a robust and highly

available data service for business-critical environments.

Disk Sanitization

Disk sanitization is the process of physically obliterating data by overwriting

disks with specified byte patterns or random data in a manner that helps

prevent recovery of current data by any known recovery methods. This

feature enables you to carry out disk sanitization by using three successive

byte-overwrite patterns per cycle and a default six cycles per operation.

Notes:

1. Disk sanitization is supported for N series filers only. Disk sanitization is

not supported for gateway models.

2. After the disk sanitization feature has been installed on an N series

storage system, it cannot be uninstalled.

FlexClone™

FlexClone enables near-instant replication of data volumes/sets without

requiring additional storage space at the time of creation. FlexClone allows

an IT administrator to make a backup copy of a database and then modify

and run testing against the test (backup) database without affecting the

online database and without taking the online database offline.

iSCSI Protocol

This feature enables the iSCSI Protocol licensed function, which is

designed to provide connectivity to clients that transfer data via the iSCSI

protocol.

LockVault™ Compliance

LockVault Compliance provides records retention rules and management of

unstructured data. LockVault enables IT administrators to “lock” a Snapshot

copy in a non-erasable and non-rewriteable format for compliant retention.

Nightly Snapshot backups save only changed blocks; full backup images

are preserved.

The ComplianceJournal™ tool keeps a log of changes between Snapshot

copies.

76 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 107: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: LockVault Compliance is a combination of the Snaplock™

Compliance and SnapVault™ Secondary software features.

LockVault Enterprise

Like LockVault Compliance, LockVault Enterprise provides records retention

rules and management of unstructured data. LockVault enables IT

administrators to “lock” a Snapshot copy in a non-erasable and

non-rewriteable format for compliant retention. Nightly Snapshot backups

save only changed blocks; full backup images are preserved. LockVault

Enterprise is designed to allow administrators to delete LockVault Enterprise

volumes.

The ComplianceJournal tool logs changes between Snapshot copies.

Note: LockVault Enterprise is a combination of the Snaplock Enterprise and

SnapVault Secondary software features.

MetroCluster

This feature is an integrated, high-availability, and business-continuance

solution designed to leverage proven technologies from IBM. It expands the

capabilities of the IBM N series portfolio of high-availability and disaster

recovery solutions–a portfolio that includes failover, data replication, and

backup solutions. MetroCluster is designed to be a simple-to-administer

solution that extends failover capability from within a data center to a

remote site. It also provides replication of data at the primary site to a

remote site, helping to keep data at the remote site current. The

combination of failover and data replication aids in the recovery from

disaster, helping prevent loss of data in less time than otherwise possible.

Microsoft Exchange Bundle

This Microsoft Exchange Bundle feature is designed to provide support for

a specified number of Single Mailbox Recovery users.

MultiStore®

MultiStore permits consolidating a large number of Windows and UNIX file

servers onto a single storage system.

MultiStore is designed to let you quickly and easily create separate, private

logical partitions in filer network and storage resources. Each virtual storage

partition is designed to maintain separation from every other storage

partition to prevent different enterprise departments that share the same

storage resources from accessing or finding other partitions. MultiStore

helps prevent information on any virtual partition from being viewed, used,

or downloaded by an unauthorized users.

NearStore

This feature is designed to help optimize an N series system for data

protection and retention applications. It enables additional concurrent

streams and SnapVault for NetBackup.

SnapLock Compliance

SnapLock Compliance provides data permanence storage that enables

compliance with government records retention regulations by using

SEC-compliant disk-based WORM technology.

SnapLock Enterprise

Like SnapLock Compliance, SnapLock Enterprise provides data

permanence storage that enables compliance with government records

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 77

Page 108: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

retention regulations by using SEC-compliant disk-based WORM

technology. SnapLock Enterprise allows administrators to delete SnapLock

Enterprise volumes.

SnapManager for Exchange

SnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storage

management while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operations

for Microsoft Exchange databases.

SnapManager™ for SQL

SnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore times

of SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies.

SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databases

using minimal disk space for each additional full backup.

SnapManager for SAP

SnapManager for SAP is designed to allow SAP administrators to backup

and restore a SAP system hosted on an Oracle database. It is integrated

with the interface for SAP br* tools for backup and recovery of SAP

systems as well as with the N series data management tools. It is designed

to simplify provisioning and data protection on enterprise SAP systems.

SnapManager for SharePoint

IBM SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint provides a single console

to manage disk-based backup and recovery of SharePoint content

databases, portals, sites, sub-sites, folders, documents, and versions of

documents. Deployed in combination with an N series storage system,

SnapManager software is designed to provide near- instantaneous hot

backups and rapid restores to help you achieve a combination of

availability, scalability, performance, and reliability for SharePoint

environments. This feature allows connectivity of any number of Microsoft

Office SharePoint servers to one N series storage system.

SnapMirror®

SnapMirror provides remote mirroring software that enables automated file

system replication between sites. SnapMirror enables asynchronous,

synchronous, and semi-synchronous remote replication over inexpensive

Internet protocols. Full backup is followed by incremental block updates.

SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle

This feature is a bundle of the SnapMirror and SnapVault Secondary

features, designed to provide improved value for the combination. It is

typically used by customers wanting to provide a mirrored, remote site for

their data backup. This feature accomplishes that by having the SnapVault

function create an initial, local backup copy of the data, and then having the

SnapMirror function copy the data to a remote site. SnapVault Primary and

SnapManager are not included in this bundle.

SnapMover®

SnapMover provides a local data migration solution for optimizing workloads

across N series systems sharing a common disk array. SnapMover allows

you to migrate the ownership of a volume from one filer to another filer with

a single command. This feature also allows for better resource utilization

and performance amongst multiple N series systems.

Note: MultiStore and Clustering are prerequisites for SnapMover.

SnapRestore®

SnapRestore enables quick restoration of snapshot data files and volumes.

It provides instant self-service volume recovery for large individual files.

78 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 109: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

SnapRestore allows volumes to be restored with a single command (as

opposed to the file level restorations that SnapShot offers).

SnapValidator™

SnapValidator provides data validation and protection for Oracle data.

SnapVault Primary

SnapVault Primary provides disk-based backup by periodically backing up a

SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault provides heterogeneous,

super-efficient, hourly disk-based online backup and restoration by

periodically backing up a snapshot copy to another system. SnapVault

Primary is the license for the primary backup system in use.

SnapVault Secondary

Like SnapVault Primary, SnapVault Secondary provides disk-based backup

by periodically backing up a SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault

Secondary is required to attain the license for the secondary backup device.

SyncMirror®

SyncMirror provides data protection by maintaining two copies of data

online; SyncMirror maintains strict physical separation between the two

copies. This feature enables synchronous local mirroring from one volume

to another volume attached to the same filer. SyncMirror includes volume

mirroring between two clustered nodes.

Table 51 on page 80, Table 52 on page 81, and Table 53 on page 82 list the

supported software features for all N series models.

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 79

Page 110: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Tabl

e 51

. N

se

ries

softw

are

licen

sed

func

tion

indi

cato

rs (M

odel

s 28

59 to

28

63)

Des

crip

tio

n

2859

A

10

2859

A

20

2862

A

10

2862

A

20

2863

A

10

2863

A

20

Dat

a O

NTA

P

6300

63

50

7001

71

01

7000

71

00

CIF

S

6302

63

52

7002

71

02

7002

71

02

HT

TP

63

03

6353

70

03

7103

70

03

7103

NF

S

6304

63

54

7004

71

04

7004

71

04

CF

O

n/a

6355

n/

a 71

05

n/a

7105

Fle

xClo

ne

6311

63

61

7011

71

11

7011

71

11

Mul

tiSto

re

6320

63

70

7020

71

20

7020

71

20

Nea

rSto

re

6322

63

72

7022

71

22

n/a

n/a

iSC

SI

Pro

toco

l 63

25

6375

70

25

7125

70

25

7125

Sna

pMirr

or/S

napV

ault

Bun

dle

6329

63

79

7029

71

29

7029

71

29

Sna

pMirr

or

6331

63

81

7031

71

31

7031

71

31

Sna

pLoc

k C

ompl

ianc

e n/

a n/

a n/

a n/

a 70

32

7132

Sna

pLoc

k E

nter

pris

e n/

a n/

a n/

a n/

a 70

33

7133

Sna

pMov

er

n/a

6384

n/

a 71

34

n/a

7134

Sna

pRes

tore

63

35

6385

70

35

7135

70

35

7135

Sna

pVau

lt P

rimar

y 63

36

6386

70

36

7136

70

36

7136

Sna

pVau

lt S

econ

dary

63

37

6387

70

37

7137

70

37

7137

Lock

Vau

lt C

ompl

ianc

e n/

a n/

a n/

a n/

a 70

40

7140

Lock

Vau

lt E

nter

pris

e n/

a n/

a n/

a n/

a 70

41

7141

Sna

pVal

idat

or

6342

63

92

7042

71

42

7042

71

42

Fib

re C

hann

el P

roto

col

6343

63

93

7043

71

43

7043

71

43

Dis

k S

aniti

zatio

n 63

44

6394

70

44

7144

70

44

7144

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r E

xcha

nge

6345

63

95

7045

71

45

7045

71

45

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r S

QL

6346

63

96

7046

71

46

7046

71

46

Adv

ance

d S

ingl

e In

stan

ce S

tora

ge

6347

63

97

7047

71

47

n/a

n/a

Mic

roso

ft E

xcha

nge

Bun

dle

(250

0 us

ers)

n/

a n/

a n/

a 71

78

n/a

n/a

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r S

hare

Poi

nt

6349

63

99

7049

71

49

n/a

n/a

80 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 111: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Tabl

e 52

. N

se

ries

softw

are

licen

sed

func

tion

indi

cato

rs (M

odel

s 28

64 to

28

66)

Des

crip

tio

n

2864

A

10

2864

A

20

2864

G

10

2864

G

20

2865

A

10

2865

A

20

2865

G

10

2865

G

20

2866

A

11

2866

A

21

2866

G

11

2866

G

21

Dat

a O

NTA

P

7200

72

50

7300

73

50

7400

74

50

7500

75

50

7600

76

50

7700

77

50

CIF

S

7201

72

51

7301

73

51

7401

74

51

7501

75

51

7601

76

51

7701

77

51

HT

TP

72

02

7252

73

02

7352

74

02

7452

75

02

7552

76

02

7652

77

02

7752

NF

S

7203

72

53

7303

73

53

7403

74

53

7503

75

53

7603

76

53

7703

77

53

CF

O

n/a

7254

n/

a 73

54

n/a

7454

n/

a 75

54

n/a

7654

n/

a 77

54

Fle

xClo

ne

7204

72

55

7304

73

55

7404

74

55

7504

75

55

7605

76

55

7705

77

55

Mul

tiSto

re

7205

72

56

7305

73

56

7405

74

56

7505

75

56

7606

76

56

7706

77

56

Sna

pMirr

or

7206

72

57

7306

73

57

7406

74

57

7506

75

57

7607

76

57

7707

77

57

Sna

pLoc

k C

ompl

ianc

e 72

07

7258

n/

a n/

a 74

07

7458

n/

a n/

a 76

08

7658

n/

a n/

a

Sna

pLoc

k E

nter

pris

e 72

08

7259

73

07

7359

74

08

7459

75

07

7559

76

09

7659

77

09

7759

Sna

pMov

er

n/a

7260

73

08

7360

n/

a 74

60

7508

75

60

n/a

7660

77

10

7760

Sna

pRes

tore

72

09

7261

73

09

7361

74

09

7461

75

09

7561

76

11

7661

77

11

7761

Sna

pVau

lt P

rimar

y 72

10

7262

73

10

7362

74

10

7462

75

10

7562

76

12

7662

77

12

7762

Sna

pVau

lt S

econ

dary

72

11

7263

73

11

7363

74

11

7463

75

11

7563

76

13

7663

77

13

7763

Lock

Vau

lt C

ompl

ianc

e 72

12

7264

n/

a n/

a 74

12

7464

n/

a n/

a 76

14

7664

n/

a n/

a

Lock

Vau

lt E

nter

pris

e 72

13

7265

73

13

7365

74

13

7465

75

13

7565

76

15

7665

77

15

7765

Syn

cMirr

or

7214

72

66

7314

73

66

7414

74

66

7514

75

66

7616

76

66

7716

77

66

Sna

pVal

idat

or

7216

72

68

7316

73

68

7416

74

68

7516

75

68

7617

76

67

7717

77

67

Fib

re C

hann

el P

roto

col

7217

72

69

7317

73

69

7417

74

69

7517

75

69

7618

76

68

7718

77

68

Dis

k S

aniti

zatio

n 72

18

7270

n/

a n/

a 74

18

7470

n/

a n/

a 76

19

7669

n/

a n/

a

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r E

xcha

nge

7219

72

71

7318

73

70

7419

74

71

7518

75

70

7620

76

70

7720

77

70

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r S

QL

7220

72

72

7319

73

71

7420

74

72

7519

75

71

7621

76

71

7721

77

71

Nea

rSto

re

7230

72

81

7322

73

72

7430

74

81

7522

75

72

7622

76

72

7722

77

72

Met

roC

lust

er

n/a

7273

n/

a 73

73

n/a

7473

n/

a 75

73

n/a

7673

n/

a 77

73

SA

N B

undl

e n/

a 72

74

n/a

n/a

n/a

7474

n/

a n/

a n/

a 76

74

n/a

n/a

iSC

SI

Pro

toco

l 72

25

7275

73

25

7375

74

25

7475

75

25

7575

76

25

7675

77

25

7775

Mic

roso

ft E

xcha

nge

Bun

dle

(100

00 us

ers)

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

7678

n/

a n/

a

Sna

pMirr

or/S

napV

ault

Bun

dle

7229

72

79

7329

73

79

7429

74

79

7529

75

79

7629

76

79

7729

77

79

Adv

ance

d S

ingl

e In

stan

ce

Sto

rage

7232

72

82

n/a

n/a

7432

74

82

n/a

n/a

7632

76

82

n/a

n/a

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r S

hare

Poi

nt

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

7649

76

99

7749

77

99

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 81

Page 112: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Tabl

e 53

. N

se

ries

softw

are

licen

sed

func

tion

indi

cato

rs (M

odel

s 28

67 to

28

69)

Des

crip

tio

n

2867

A

11

2867

A

21

2867

G

11

2867

G

21

2868

A

10

2868

A

20

2868

G

10

2868

G

20

2869

A

10

2869

A

20

2869

G

10

2869

G

20

Dat

a O

NTA

P

7800

78

50

7900

79

50

6000

60

50

6100

61

50

6400

64

50

6200

62

50

CIF

S

7801

78

51

7901

79

51

7601

60

51

7701

61

51

7401

74

51

7501

75

51

HT

TP

78

02

7852

79

02

7952

76

02

6052

77

02

6152

74

02

7452

75

02

7552

NF

S

7803

78

53

7903

79

53

7603

60

53

7703

61

53

7403

74

53

7503

75

53

CF

O

n/a

7854

n/

a 79

54

n/a

6054

n/

a 61

54

n/a

7454

n/

a 75

54

Fle

xClo

ne

7805

78

55

7905

79

55

7605

60

55

7705

61

55

7404

74

55

7504

75

55

Mul

tiSto

re

7806

78

56

7906

79

56

7606

60

56

7706

61

56

7405

74

56

7505

75

56

Sna

pMirr

or

7807

78

57

7907

79

57

7607

60

57

7707

61

57

7406

74

57

7506

75

57

Sna

pLoc

k C

ompl

ianc

e 78

08

7858

n/

a n/

a 76

08

6058

n/

a n/

a 74

07

7458

n/

a n/

a

Sna

pLoc

k E

nter

pris

e 78

09

7859

79

09

7959

76

09

6059

77

09

6159

74

08

7459

75

07

7559

Sna

pMov

er

n/a

7860

79

10

7960

n/

a 60

60

7710

61

60

n/a

7460

75

08

7560

Sna

pRes

tore

78

11

7861

79

11

7961

76

11

6061

77

11

6161

74

09

7461

75

09

7561

Sna

pVau

lt P

rimar

y 78

12

7862

79

12

7962

76

12

6062

77

12

6162

74

10

7462

75

10

7562

Sna

pVau

lt S

econ

dary

78

13

7863

79

13

7963

76

13

6063

77

13

6163

74

11

7463

75

11

7563

Lock

Vau

lt C

ompl

ianc

e 78

14

7864

n/

a n/

a 76

14

6064

n/

a n/

a 74

12

7464

n/

a n/

a

Lock

Vau

lt E

nter

pris

e 78

15

7865

79

15

7965

76

15

6065

77

15

6165

74

13

7465

75

13

7565

Syn

cMirr

or

7816

78

66

7916

79

66

7616

60

66

7716

61

66

7414

74

66

7514

75

66

Sna

pVal

idat

or

7817

78

67

7917

79

67

7617

60

67

7717

61

67

7416

74

68

7516

75

68

Fib

re C

hann

el P

roto

col

7818

78

68

7918

79

68

7618

60

68

7718

61

68

7417

74

69

7517

75

69

Dis

k S

aniti

zatio

n 78

19

7869

n/

a n/

a 76

19

6069

n/

a n/

a 74

18

7470

n/

a n/

a

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r E

xcha

nge

7820

78

70

7920

79

70

7620

60

70

7720

61

70

7419

74

71

7518

75

70

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r S

QL

7821

78

71

7921

79

71

7621

60

71

7721

61

71

7420

74

72

7519

75

71

Nea

rSto

re

7822

78

72

7922

79

72

7622

60

72

7722

61

72

7430

74

81

7522

75

72

Met

roC

lust

er

n/a

7873

n/

a 79

73

n/a

6073

n/

a 61

73

n/a

7473

n/

a 75

73

SA

N B

undl

e n/

a 78

74

n/a

n/a

n/a

6074

n/

a n/

a n/

a 74

74

n/a

n/a

iSC

SI

Pro

toco

l 78

25

7875

79

25

7975

76

25

6075

77

25

6175

74

25

7475

75

25

7575

Mic

roso

ft E

xcha

nge

Bun

dle

(500

0 us

ers)

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

6078

n/

a n/

a n/

a n/

a n/

a n/

a

Sna

pMirr

or/S

napV

ault

Bun

dle

7829

78

79

7929

79

79

7629

60

79

7729

61

79

7429

74

79

7529

75

79

Adv

ance

d S

ingl

e In

stan

ce

Sto

rage

7832

78

82

n/a

n/a

7632

60

82

n/a

n/a

7432

74

82

n/a

n/a

Sna

pMan

ager

fo

r S

hare

Poi

nt

7849

78

99

7949

79

99

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

82 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 113: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM N series host software features

This section describes the host software features available for your N series storage

system. Host software features are installed directly on the host that supports your

N series storage system.

Operation Manager Core (OMC)

The OMC features are designed to provide a central point of control and to

provide alerts, reports, and configuration tools. These tools are designed to

help manage storage and content delivery infrastructure, consistent with

business requirements, and help maximize availability and reduce total cost

of ownership.

Protection Manager

The Protection Manager feature provides backup and replication

management software for an N series disk-based data protection

environment. It is designed to help protect data and support high

productivity by providing policy-based management, including when used in

automated data protection configurations.

Single Mailbox Recovery

Single Mailbox Recovery (SMBR) adds advanced function to the

SnapManager for Exchange feature. Single Mailbox Recovery restores

individual mail items from any recent (hourly, daily, or weekly) snapshot.

This helps allow rapid search of archived snapshot copies of previously

deleted messages that are no longer in the current mailbox. Single Mailbox

Recovery also includes Extract Wizards for Microsoft NT Backup, VERITAS

Backup Exec, and, optionally, Extract Wizards for CA BrightStor ARCserve,

Legato NetWorker, and VERITAS Net Backup. The Extract Wizards are

designed to restore both private and public exchange information and

stored data from tape or disk backups to any alternate location (machine,

volume, or folder), thereby helping to eliminate the need for a recovery

server.

SMBR Content Analysis Wizard

The SMBR Content Analysis Wizard (CAW) is designed to enable you to

automate and save search results with Microsoft Exchange by selecting

sources, including entire Exchange Database (EDB) files, individual

mailboxes from an EDB, or folders from an EDB. Any number of sources is

allowed.

SnapDrive™

SnapDrive provides a software application designed to enhance the storage

management capabilities in an operating system environment, including

easier management of dynamic volume, cluster, snapshot, and replication

management.

SnapManager for SQL

SnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore times

of SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies.

SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databases

using minimal disk space for each additional full backup.

SnapManager for Exchange

SnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storage

management while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operations

for Microsoft Exchange databases.

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 83

Page 114: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

SnapManager for Oracle

SnapManager for Oracle allows connection of one Oracle host server to a

storage controller.

Table 54. IBM N series host software

Description Feature

SnapDrive - AIX 1-2 Procs 8000

SnapDrive - AIX 3-4 Procs 8001

SnapDrive - AIX 5-8 Procs 8002

SnapDrive - AIX 9+ Procs 8003

SnapDrive - HP-UX 1-2 Procs 8004

SnapDrive - HP-UX 3-4 Procs 8005

SnapDrive - HP-UX 5-8 Procs 8006

SnapDrive - HP-UX 9+ Procs 8007

SnapDrive - Solaris 1-2 Procs 8008

SnapDrive - Solaris 3-4 Procs 8009

SnapDrive - Solaris 5-8 Procs 8010

SnapDrive - Solaris 9+ Procs 8011

SnapDrive - Linux 1-2 Procs 8020

SnapDrive - Linux 3-4 Procs 8021

SnapDrive - Linux 5-8 Procs 8022

SnapDrive - Linux 9+ Procs 8023

SnapDrive for UNIX Media Kit 8040

SnapDrive for Windows 8050

SnapDrive for Windows Media Kit 8051

ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO 8052

ONTAP DSM Win MPIO Media Kit 8053

FCP Host Attach Kit - Windows 8100

Base FCP Host Attach Kit - AIX 8110

AIX Multipathing - 1-2 Procs 8111

AIX Multipathing - 3-4 Procs 8112

AIX Multipathing - 5-8 Procs 8113

AIX Multipathing - 9+ Procs 8114

AIX Media Kit for Multipath 8119

FCP Host Attach Kit - Linux 8120

FCP Host Attach Kit - HP-UX 8121

FCP Host Attach Kit - Solaris 8122

FCP Host Utilities - VMWare 8123

SnapManager for Exchange - Host 8131

SnapManager for Exchange - Media Kit 8132

SnapManager for SQL - Host 8141

SnapManager for SQL - Media Kit 8142

SnapManager for Oracle 8143

84 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 115: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 54. IBM N series host software (continued)

Description Feature

SnapManager for Oracle - Media Kit 8144

SnapManager for SAP 8145

SnapManager for SAP - Media Kit 8146

SnapManager for SharePoint 8147

SnapManager for SharePoint - Media Kit 8148

Single Mailbox Recovery 100 pk 8150

Single Mailbox Recovery 500 pk 8151

Single Mailbox Recovery 1000 pk 8152

Single Mailbox Recovery 2500 pk 8153

Single Mailbox Recovery 5K pk 8154

Single Mailbox Recovery 10K pk 8155

Single Mailbox Recovery 50K pk 8156

Single Mailbox Recovery Media Kit 8157

Single Mailbox Recovery CA-ARCSERVE Extract Wizard 8158

Single Mailbox Recovery Tivoli® Tape Extract Wizard 8159

Single Mailbox Recovery Legato Tape Extract Wizard 8160

Single Mailbox Recovery NetBackup Extract Wizard 8161

Single Mailbox Recovery PST Tape Extract Wizard 8162

Single Mailbox Recovery HP Extract Wizard 8163

Single Mailbox Recovery Commvault Galaxy Ex Wizard 8164

Single Mailbox Recovery UltraBac Extract Wizard 8165

Single Mailbox Recovery Agent for Advanced Search 8166

Single Mailbox Recovery Content Analysis Wizard 8167

Operations Manager Store Resource Management 8257

Operations Manager Media Kit 8258

Operations Manager Core tier 1 license 8261

Operations Manager Core tier 2 license 8262

Operations Manager Core tier 3 license 8263

Operations Manager Core tier 4 license 8264

Operations Manager Core tier 5 license 8265

Operations Manager Core tier 6 license 8266

Operations Manager Core tier 7 license 8267

Protect Manager tier 1 license 8268

Protect Manager tier 1 license 8269

Protect Manager tier 1 license 8270

Protect Manager tier 1 license 8271

Protect Manager tier 1 license 8272

Protect Manager tier 1 license 8273

Protect Manager tier 1 license 8274

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 85

Page 116: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

86 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 117: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 4. Site planning

This chapter contains information for site planning for the N series storage systems

and expansion units.

Hardware specifications

The following sections list the hardware specifications for the following N series

storage systems and expansion units:

v “N3300 and N3600 hardware specifications”

v “N3700 hardware specifications” on page 95

v “N5000 series system hardware specifications” on page 97

v “N7000 series hardware specifications” on page 101

v “EXN1000 hardware specifications” on page 103

v “EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications” on page 105

N3300 and N3600 hardware specifications

The following tables list the physical characteristics and environmental and electrical

requirements for N3300 and N3600 storage systems.

CAUTION:

Two people are required to lift the N3300 system during installation. Three

people are required to lift the N3600 system during installation.

Table 55. N3300 and N3600 system hardware specifications

Physical characteristics

Weight 2859-A10, 2859-A20 Active/active: 66 lbs (30 kg) full

Single controller: 64 lbs (28 kg)

empty

2862-A10, 2862-A20 Active/active: 112 lbs (51 kg) full

Single controller: 110 lbs (50 kg)

empty

Rack units 2859-A10, 2859-A20 2U

2862-A10, 2862-A20 4U

Height 2859-A10, 2859-A20 3.45 in. (8.75 cm)

2862-A10, 2862-A20 6.95 in. (17.75 cm)

Width 17.7 in. (44.9 cm)

Depth 2859-A10, 2859-A20 56 cm (22 in)

2862-A10, 2862-A20 58.5 cm (23 in)

Clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 10 in. (25.4 cm)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Front-maintenance All versions 30 in. (76.2 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 30 in. (76.2 cm)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 87

Page 118: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 56. N3300 and N3600 system environmental requirements

Environmental requirements

Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might

increase the risk of device failure.

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 140° F

(-40° C to 60° C)

Relative humidity 20 to 80%

noncondensing

Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range 40 to 55%

Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)

Maximum altitude2, 3 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 N3300 54 dBA @ 23° C

7.2 bels @ 23° C

N3600 49 dBA @ 23° C

6.7 bels @ 23° C

1. Noise emission notes:

a. LWAd

is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.

b. LpAm

is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator

position (if any) for a production series of machines.

c. <LpA>m

is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at

the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.

d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).

e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in

conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.

f. N/A - not available.2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)

above 915 m (3000 ft).

3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)

above 305 m (1000 ft).

4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of

the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.

5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance

with ISO 9296.

The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N3300 and N3600

and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N3300 and N3600

systems.

Table 57. N3300 and N3600 maximum electrical power

System Maximum electrical power

N3300 100-240 V ac, 10-4 A per node, 50-60 Hz

N3600 100-240 V ac, 12-5 A per node, 50-60 Hz

88 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 119: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU

and high fan speed, with power distributed over one power cord. Per PSU

indicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating under normal

condition. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system

operating under normal condition and power distributed over two power

cords.

Table 58. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module

Input voltage

Disk

drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input current

measured, A

144 GB

SAS

drives

3.83 1.7 3.39 1.94 0.94 1.87

300 GB

SAS

drives

4.44 1.95 3.89 2.23 1.08 2.16

250 GB

SATA

drives

3.07 1.47 2.94 1.60 0.79 1.57

500 GB

SATA

drives

3.22 1.55 3.09 1.68 0.81 1.61

750 GB

SATA

drives

3.37 1.61 3.22 1.69 0.83 1.66

Input power

measured, W

144 GB

SAS

drives

377 165 330 371 174 348

300 GB

SAS

drives

439 191 381 431 204 407

250 GB

SATA

drives

300 144 287 304 145 289

500 GB

SATA

drives

319 151 301 322 147 294

750 GB

SATA

drives

332 158 316 327 152.5 305

Chapter 4. Site planning 89

Page 120: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 58. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued)

Input voltage

Disk

drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

144 GB

SAS

drives

1287 563 1125 1264 593 1185

300 GB

SAS

drives

1497 649 1298 1470 669 1338

250 GB

SATA

drives

1024 490 979 1035 494 987

500 GB

SATA

drives

1088 514 1028 1099 501 1002

750 GB

SATA

drives

1133 539 1077 1114 520 1039

Inrush peak, A All drives 16 16 16 34 34 34

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Table 59. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules

Input voltage

Disk

drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input current

measured, A

144 GB

SAS

drives

4.69 2.05 4.09 2.34 1.11 2.22

300 GB

SAS

drives

4.94 2.38 4.75 2.45 1.19 2.37

250 GB

SATA

drives

3.82 1.86 3.72 1.91 0.93 1.86

500 GB

SATA

drives

3.94 1.90 3.80 1.97 0.97 1.93

750 GB

SATA

drives

4.13 1.95 3.89 2.09 0.99 1.98

90 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 121: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 59. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued)

Input voltage

Disk

drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input power

measured, W

144 GB

SAS

drives

464 200 400 452 210 419

300 GB

SAS

drives

488 233 465 476 224 448

250 GB

SATA

drives

377 183 365 367 173 345

500 GB

SATA

drives

389 186 372 381 180 360

750 GB

SATA

drives

409 191 382 404 186 372

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

144 GB

SAS

drives

1583 683 1365 1542 714.5 1429

300 GB

SAS

drives

1665 794 1587 1624 715 1527

250 GB

SATA

drives

1287 623 1245 1253 589 1178

500 GB

SATA

drives

1328 634 1268 1298 614 1227

750 GB

SATA

drives

1395 651 1302 1377 634 1268

Inrush peak, A All drives 16 16 16 34 34 34

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Table 60. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input current

measured, A

1.67 0.8 1.60 0.9 0.45 0.89

Input power

measured, W

165 77 153 160 75 149

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

563 261 521 544 253 506

Inrush peak, A 16 16 16 34 34 34

Chapter 4. Site planning 91

Page 122: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 60. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input power

frequency, Hz

50 to 60

Table 61. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input current

measured, A

2.63 1.12 2.23 1.34 0.59 1.18

Input power

measured, W

254 108 215 240 104 208

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

866 366 731 818 355 709

Inrush peak, A 16 16 16 34 34 34

Input power

frequency, Hz

50 to 60

Table 62. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module

Input voltage

Disk

drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input current

measured, A

144 GB

SAS

drives

5.64 2.38 4.76 2.82 1.33 2.65

300 GB

SAS

drives

6.62 2.96 5.92 3.27 2.76 5.52

250 GB

SATA

drives

4.40 2.02 4.04 2.30 1.04 2.07

500 GB

SATA

drives

4.64 2.18 4.36 2.33 1.09 2.17

750 GB

SATA

drives

5.07 2.26 4.51 2.46 1.20 2.40

92 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 123: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 62. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued)

Input voltage

Disk

drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input power

measured, W

144 GB

SAS

drives

560 233 465 547 251 502

300 GB

SAS

drives

658 292 583 636 262 523

250 GB

SATA

drives

435 197 393 439 193 386

500 GB

SATA

drives

459 213 425 447 204 408

750 GB

SATA

drives

504 220 439 474 224 447

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

144 GB

SAS

drives

1909 794 1587 1864 855 1710

300 GB

SAS

drives

2243 994 1988 2165 891 1782

250 GB

SATA

drives

1482 670 1339 1497 659 1317

500 GB

SATA

drives

1564 724 1448 1523 696 1392

750 GB

SATA

drives

1718 749 1497 1617 762 1523

Inrush peak, A All drives 20 19 19 40 36 36

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Chapter 4. Site planning 93

Page 124: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 63. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules

Input voltage

Disk

drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input current

measured, A

144 GB

SAS

drives

6.31 2.84 5.68 3.09 1.45 2.89

300 GB

SAS

drives

7.51 3.34 6.68 3.73 1.71 3.41

250 GB

SATA

drives

5.54 2.49 4.98 2.7 1.26 2.52

500 GB

SATA

drives

5.74 2.84 5.67 2.89 1.33 2.65

750 GB

SATA

drives

5.91 2.74 5.74 2.97 1.39 2.77

Input power

measured, W

144 GB

SAS

drives

628 279 558 600 275 550

300 GB

SAS

drives

747 330 659 728 328 655

250 GB

SATA

drives

549 244 487 518 237 474

500 GB

SATA

drives

567 277 554 561 252 503

750 GB

SATA

drives

585 268 536 575 262 524

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

144 GB

SAS

drives

2142 951 1902 2044 938 1876

300 GB

SAS

drives

2547 1124 2247 2483 1116 2232

250 GB

SATA

drives

1872 831 1662 1767 809 1617

500 GB

SATA

drives

1932 946 1891 1913 857 1714

750 GB

SATA

drives

1996 914 1827 1962 893 1785

Inrush peak, A All drives 20 19 19 40 36 36

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

94 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 125: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 64. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input current

measured, A

2.10 0.90 1.80 1.10 0.50 0.99

Input power

measured, W

205 86.5 173 198 84 168

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

698 295 589 675 287 574

Inrush peak, A 20 19 19 40 36 36

Input power

frequency, Hz

50 to 60

Table 65. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System

Worst-case Per PSU System

Input current

measured, A

2.62 1.19 2.37 1.35 0.62 1.24

Input power

measured, W

256 114 227 250 111 222

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

874 387 773 851 379 758

Inrush peak, A 20 19 19 40 36 36

Input power

frequency, Hz

50 to 60

N3700 hardware specifications

The following tables list the physical characteristics and environmental and electrical

requirements for your N3700 storage system.

DANGER

Three people are required to lift the N3700 during installation. Do not

remove the disk drives to reduce the weight.

Table 66. N3700 physical characteristics and environmental requirements

Physical characteristics

Weight With maximum

number of disk drives

78.8 lbs (35.8 kg)

Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)

Rack units 3U

Height 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)

Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)

Depth 20 in. (50.9 cm)

Chapter 4. Site planning 95

Page 126: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 66. N3700 physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)

Clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Environmental requirements

Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might

increase the risk of device failure.

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F

(-40° C to 65° C)

Relative humidity 10 to 90%

noncondensing

Recommended operating temperature

relative humidity range

40 to 55%

Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)

Maximum altitude2, 3 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C

1. Noise emission notes:

a. LWAd

is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.

b. LpAm

is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator

position (if any) for a production series of machines.

c. <LpA>m

is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at

the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.

d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).

e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in

conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.

f. N/A - not available.2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)

above 915 m (3000 ft).

3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)

above 305 m (1000 ft).

4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of

the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.

5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance

with ISO 9296.

96 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 127: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 67. N3700 electrical requirements

Input voltage Disk drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Input current

measured, A

10K drives 3.12 1.88/3.76 1.52 0.92/1.83

15K drives 3.83 2.15/4.30 1.83 1.04

Input power

measured, W

10K drives 311 187.5/375 299 177.5/355

15K drives 382 214.5/429 361 202.5/405

Thermal dissipation,

BTU/hr

10K drives 1062 639.5/1279 1020 606/1212

15K drives 1302 731.5/1463 1230 690/1380

Inrush peak, A 10K drives 21 20 12.5 12

15K drives 21 20 12.5 12

Maximum electrical power 7 A 3.5 A

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.

Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

N5000 series system hardware specifications

The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental and

electrical requirements for N5000 series systems.

svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

DANGER

The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb).

It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

Table 68. N5000 series physical characteristics and environmental requirements

Physical characteristics

Weight 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,

2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,

2869-A10, 2869-G10

75 lbs (34 kg)

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,

2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,

2869-A20, 2869-G20

150 lbs (68 kg)

Rack units 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,

2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,

2869-A10, 2869-G10

3U

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,

2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,

2869-A20, 2869-G20

6U

Chapter 4. Site planning 97

Page 128: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 68. N5000 series physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)

Height 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,

2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,

2869-A10, 2869-G10

5.12 in. (13 cm)

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,

2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,

2869-A20, 2869-G20

10.6 in. (26 cm)

Width 17.7 in. (44.9 cm)

Depth 61 cm (24 in) without cable

management tray

76.2 cm (30 in) with cable

management tray

Clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Environmental requirements

Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might

increase the risk of device failure.

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 65° F

(-40° C to 65° C)

Relative humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing

Recommended operating temperature relative humidity

range

40 to 55%

Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)

Maximum altitude2, 3 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 54 dBA @ 23° C

5.4 bels @ 23° C

98 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 129: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 68. N5000 series physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)

1. Noise emission notes:

a. LWAd

is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.

b. LpAm

is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator

position (if any) for a production series of machines.

c. <LpA>m

is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at

the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.

d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).

e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in

conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.

f. N/A - not available.2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)

above 915 m (3000 ft).

3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)

above 305 m (1000 ft).

4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of

the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.

5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance

with ISO 9296.

In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and

high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Table 69. N5200 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Input current

measured, A

3.39 1.2/2.4 1.77 0.71/1.40 8.2 2.85/5.70

Input power

measured, W

336 118/236 329 115/229 328 113/226

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

1144 402.5/805 1122 392/783 1118 286/771

Inrush peak, A 38 37 40 40 n/a n/a

Maximum

electrical power

10 A 5 A n/a n/a

Input power

frequency, Hz

50 to 60 n/a n/a

Table 70. N5300 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Input current

measured, A

3.66 1.7/3.4 1.9 0.95/1.9 7.94 3.7/7.4

Input power

measured, W

363 169/228 358 165/330 318 148/296

Chapter 4. Site planning 99

Page 130: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 70. N5300 electrical requirements (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

1238 576/1152 1221 564/1127 1084 506/1011

Inrush peak, A 38 37 40 40 n/a n/a

Maximum

electrical power

10 A 5 A n/a n/a

Input power

frequency, Hz

50 to 60 n/a n/a

Table 71. N5500 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Input current

measured, A

3.88 1.7/3.4 2.04 0.95/1.9 9.49 4.0/8.0

Input power

measured, W

386 164/328 384 164/327 380 160/319

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

1317 560/1119 1309 559/1116 1295 545/1089

Inrush peak, A 38 37 40 40 n/a n/a

Maximum

electrical power

10 A 5 A n/a n/a

Input power

frequency, Hz

50 to 60 n/a n/a

Table 72. N5600 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Input current

measured, A

4.03 1.85/3.7 2.06 1.05/2.1 10.57 4.7/9.4

Input power

measured, W

400 181/362 387 178/355 423 188/376

Thermal

dissipation,

BTU/hr

1365 617/1233 1320 606/1212 1442 642/1283

Inrush peak, A 38 37 40 40 n/a n/a

Maximum

electrical power

10 A 5 A n/a n/a

100 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 131: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 72. N5600 electrical requirements (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Input power

frequency, Hz

50 to 60 n/a n/a

N7000 series hardware specifications

The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental and

electrical requirements for N7000 series systems.

svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

DANGER

The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb).

It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

Table 73. N7000 series system physical characteristics and environmental requirements

Physical characteristics

Weight 2866-A11, 2866-G11, 2867-A11,

2867-G11

54.8 kg (121 lb)

2866-A21, 2866-G21, 2867-A21,

2867-G21

109.6 kg (242 lb)

Rack units 2866-A11, 2866-G11, 2867-A11,

2867-G11

6U

2866-A21, 2866-G21, 2867-A21,

2867-G21

12U

Height 2866-A11, 2866-G11, 2867-A11,

2867-G11

263 mm (10.4 in)

2866-A21, 2866-G21, 2867-A21,

2867-G21

526 mm (20.8 in)

Width 446 mm (17.6 in)

Depth 695 mm (27.4 in) without cable

management tray

782 mm (30.8 in) with cable

management tray

Clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.2 cm)

Front-maintenance All versions 25 in. (63.5 cm)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 40 in. (102 cm)

Chapter 4. Site planning 101

Page 132: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 73. N7000 series system physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)

Environmental requirements

Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might increase the risk of device

failure.

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F(-40° C to 65° C)

Relative humidity 10 to 90% noncondensing

Recommended operating temperature relative humidity

range

40 to 55%

Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)

Maximum altitude,2 3 2133 m (7,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 49 dBA @ 23° C5 bels @ 23° C

1. Noise emission notes:

a. LWAd

is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.

b. LpAm

is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator position (if any) for a production

series of machines.

c. <LpA>m

is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at the one-meter positions

for a production series of machines.

d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).

e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS

7574/4.

f. N/A - not available.2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft).

3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft).

4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately

1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.

5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and

high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Table 74. N7700 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case

Typical single

PSU/system Worst-case

Typical single

PSU/system

Input current measured,

A

9.26 2.75/5.4 4.6 1.4/2.8

Input power measured,

W

922 266/531 882 255/509

Thermal dissipation,

BTU/hr

3144 906/1812 3008 869/1737

Inrush peak, A 11.6 11.2 22.8 22.8

Maximum electrical

power

12 A 6 A

Input power frequency,

Hz

50 to 60

102 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 133: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 75. N7900 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case

Typical single

PSU/system Worst-case

Typical single

PSU/system

Input current measured,

A

9.72 2.8/5.6 4.84 1.45/2.9

Input power measured,

W

966 274/548 928 266/532

Thermal dissipation,

BTU/hr

3293 935/1870 3166 908/1816

Inrush peak, A 11.6 11.2 22.8 22.8

Maximum electrical

power

12 A 6 A

Input power frequency,

Hz

50 to 60

EXN1000 hardware specifications

The following table lists the characteristics and requirements for the EXN1000

storage expansion unit.

DANGER

Three people are required to lift the EXN1000 during installation.

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware.

Table 76. EXN1000 physical characteristics and environmental requirements

Physical characteristics

Weight With maximum

number of disk drives

77 lbs (35 kg)

Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)

Rack units 3U

Height 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)

Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)

Depth 20 in. (50.9 cm)

Clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Front-maintenance All versions 25 in. (63.5)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Environmental requirements

Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might

increase the risk of device failure.

Chapter 4. Site planning 103

Page 134: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 76. EXN1000 physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F

(-40° C to 65° C)

Relative humidity 10 to 90%

noncondensing

Recommended operating temperature

relative humidity range

40 to 55%

Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)

Maximum altitude2, 3 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C

1. Noise emission notes:

a. LWAd

is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.

b. LpAm

is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator

position (if any) for a production series of machines.

c. <LpA>m

is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at

the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.

d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).

e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in

conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.

f. N/A - not available.2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)

above 915 m (3000 ft).

3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)

above 305 m (1000 ft).

4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of

the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.

5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance

with ISO 9296.

Table 77. EXN1000 electrical requirements

Input voltage Disk drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Input current

measured, A

7.2K drives 2.85 1.56/3.12 1.43 0.78/1.56

Input power

measured, W

7.2K drives 284 155/310 283 152/304

Thermal dissipation,

BTU/hr

7.2K drives 968 529/1058 964 517.5/1035

Inrush peak, A 7.2K drives 21 20 12.5 12.0

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Maximum electrical power 7 A 3.5 A

104 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 135: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.

Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN2000 or

EXN4000 storage expansion unit.

DANGER

Three people are required to lift the EXN2000 or EXN4000 during

installation.

Table 78. EXN2000 and EXN4000 physical characteristics and environmental requirements

Physical characteristics

Weight With maximum

number of disk drives

77 lbs (35 kg)

Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)

Rack units 3U

Height 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)

Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)

Depth 20 in. (50.9 cm)

Clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Environmental requirements

Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might

increase the risk of device failure.

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F

(-40° C to 65° C)

Relative humidity 10 to 90%

noncondensing

Recommended operating temperature

relative humidity range

40 to 55%

Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)

Maximum altitude2, 3 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C

Chapter 4. Site planning 105

Page 136: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 78. EXN2000 and EXN4000 physical characteristics and environmental

requirements (continued)

1. Noise emission notes:

a. LWAd

is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.

b. LpAm

is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator

position (if any) for a production series of machines.

c. <LpA>m

is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at

the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.

d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).

e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in

conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.

f. N/A - not available.2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)

above 915 m (3000 ft).

3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)

above 305 m (1000 ft).

4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of

the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.

5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance

with ISO 9296.

Table 79. EXN2000 and EXN4000 electrical requirements

Input voltage Disk drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system Worst-case

Typical

single

PSU/system

Input current

measured, A

10K drives 2.81 1.51/3.01 1.38 0.76/1.51

15K drives 3.42 1.83/3.65 1.66 0.91/1.82

Input power

measured, W

10K drives 279 148.5/299 272 145/290

15K drives 342 181.5/363 329 176.5/353

Thermal dissipation,

BTU/hr

10K drives 953 510/1020 926 495/990

15K drives 1167 619/1238 1122 602/1204

Inrush peak, A 10K drives 21 20 12.5 12

15K drives 21 20 12.5 12

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Maximum electrical power 7 A 3.5 A

Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.

Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Important factors to consider

When installing the N series storage system, you must keep in mind certain

environmental factors. When you are planning your installation give careful

consideration to the following:

v Weight of the N series storage system. See “Hardware specifications” on page

87. The N series storage system requires three people to install it.

v Rack considerations. The clearances and mounting requirements are specified in

“Rack considerations” on page 107.

106 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 137: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v Power supplies and power requirements. You may need to provide new service

or install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). See “Power supplies and power

requirements” for more information.

v System input power. See “System input power” on page 108 for more

information.

v Thermal considerations. See “Thermal considerations” on page 109.

v Floor loading. See “Floor-loading specifications” on page 110.

v Floor planning. See “Floor plan considerations” on page 110 for more

information.

v Cabling. Both Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling will be required. See

Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 113.

v AutoSupport. AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featured

in the Data ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems

that continuously monitors the health of your system. See Chapter 6,

“AutoSupport,” on page 119.

Rack considerations

The three recommended racks for the N series storage system are:

v IBM 7014 Model T00 (a 36U high rack)

v IBM 7014 Model T42 (a 42U high rack)

v IBM 2101 Model N00 (a 36U high rack)

The N series storage system can also be mounted in some other IBM and non-IBM

racks, provided the rack meets all the requirements specified in Appendix D,

“Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 133.

When clustering N series storage systems, the physical proximity of the cluster

nodes is determined by the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables that are

ordered. Feature codes are available for cluster cables ranging in size from 2 m to

30 m. For more information, see Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on

page 7.

Power supplies and power requirements

N series storage systems contain two hot-swappable power supplies. They are both

active at the same time, but have sufficient capacity that if one fails the other can

assume the full load. Each power supply has a separate power cord. Separate

power sources for each power cord are recommended.

Power cords with attached plugs are provided for most ac-powered systems. The

power cords are ordered by feature code and at least one power cord must be

specified when the ordering the N series storage system. A feature code contains

two cords, one for each power supply. Power cables vary by country and are listed

in Appendix B, “Power cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Specific voltage information for NAS storage systems and expansion units is

provided in the following tables:

v N3300 storage systems:

– Table 58 on page 89

– Table 59 on page 90

– Table 60 on page 91

Chapter 4. Site planning 107

Page 138: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

– Table 61 on page 92

v N3600 storage systems:

– Table 62 on page 92

– Table 63 on page 94

– Table 64 on page 95

– Table 65 on page 95

v N3700 storage systems: Table 67 on page 97

v N5000 series storage systems:

– Table 69 on page 99

– Table 70 on page 99

– Table 71 on page 100

– Table 72 on page 100

v N7000 series storage systems:

– Table 74 on page 102

– Table 75 on page 103

v EXN1000 expansion units: Table 77 on page 104

v EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units: Table 79 on page 106

Important:

1. Before you install the N series storage system, you must make sure that its

proposed location meets the power requirements. If necessary, consult an

electrician to determine if your electrical infrastructure can support the N series

storage system that you are installing.

2. Consider security when planning your power requirements. (For example, your

power mains should be in a secure area.) See “Security” on page 111 for more

information.

System input power

The following input power considerations apply to all system units. See “Rack

considerations” on page 107 for additional information about power.

Electrical considerations

These topics should be considered before you install a system.

Primary computer power service

Although a dedicated power supply is not necessary, for maximum reliability, the

computer power panel should connect to feeders that do not serve other loads.

Connect electrical noise-producing devices to panels separate from those feeding

the system units.

Grounding

For information about grounding your N series storage systems and expansion

units, refer to the Installation and Setup Instructions for your N series products.

To ensure proper grounding, a licensed electrician should check the grounding and

receptacles for conformance with the country electrical codes.

108 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 139: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Computer room emergency power-off controls

As a safety precaution, you should provide computer room emergency power-off

controls for disconnecting the main service wiring that supplies the computer

equipment. Install these controls at a convenient place for the operator and next to

the main exit doors of the room.

Lightning protection

You should install lightning protection devices when in environments such as these:

v An overhead power service supplies the primary power.

v The area is subject to electrical storms or equivalent-type power surges.

Three-phase power

If your rack power distribution uses three-phase power, consult a licensed

electrician to ensure that the loads are properly balanced.

Thermal considerations

When installed in a rack, all components, including the N series storage system,

should have front-to-back air flow. Failure to do so results in a thermal loop, where

the heated exhaust air from one unit is drawn into the air intake of another, which

further heats the air. Eventually a unit will shut down or fail to operate due to high

temperature.

Cold aisle

Air

cond

ition

er

Hot aisle

back

front

back

back

front

Airflow

front2440 mm betweencenter lines of hotand cold aisle

Perforated tilesor gratings

1220 mm coldaisle width

Racks Nsip

g0

01

Racks

Racks

Airflow

Airflow

Figure 4. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration

Chapter 4. Site planning 109

Page 140: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Floor-loading specifications

Consult with an engineer to determine your floor-loading specifications. See

“Hardware specifications” on page 87 for information on the N series storage

system weight. See Appendix D, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on

page 133 for rack floor-loading specifications.

Floor plan considerations

You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. This

section describes floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. It

also describes what security measures to keep in mind when doing floor planning.

Before you create your floor plan, consider these variables:

v Flow of work and personnel within the area

v Placement to optimize cooling, such as positioning the unit over a cutout in a

raised floor

v Routing of cables and length of cables

v Location of safety equipment

v Future expansion

Creating a floor plan

It is important to ensure that the total weight of installed racks and equipment does

not exceed the maximum amount of weight that the floor in your facility supports.

You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. This

section discusses floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. It

also discusses security measures to keep in mind when doing your floor planning.

Note: You might need to prepare and analyze several plans before choosing a final

one. If you install more than one N series storage system in more than one

installation stage, prepare a separate plan for each installation stage.

Begin with an accurate drawing of the installation area (blueprints and floor plans

are appropriate). Include the following items in your floor plan:

v Service and operational clearances.

v If the N series storage system will be on a raised floor, consider any objects that

might obstruct cable routing and the height of the raised floor.

v If the N series storage system will not be on a raised floor, consider these

factors:

– Placement of cables to minimize obstruction

– Amount of additional cable required if the cable is indirectly routed between N

series storage system (for example, along the walls or suspended from the

ceiling)

v Location of:

– Power receptacles

– Air conditioning equipment and controls

– File cabinets, desks, and other office equipment

– Room emergency power-off controls

– All entrances, walkways, exits, windows, columns, and pillars

v LAN and telephone connections.

110 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 141: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

When you finish the floor plan, review it to make sure that all cables to be

connected to the N series storage system are long enough. Also ensure that the N

series storage system has enough clearance.

Security

In forming your floor plan, you should consider ways to keep your N series storage

system secure. For security purposes, use these precautions:

v Choose a trusted administrator.

v Place any equipment that may disrupt operations (for example, power supplies)

in a secure location.

v Keep rack cabinet keys in a secure location.

Chapter 4. Site planning 111

Page 142: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

112 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 143: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 5. Cable planning

Before ordering, the customer is asked to develop specific planning information

concerning the physical layout of the installation. This chapter can help you plan

your layout by presenting useful planning information for interconnecting the system

units and devices.

You must plan the type of cable, cable path, and cable length. Consider not only

your current needs but also your anticipated growth and the relocation of personnel.

To assist with the installation of your system, you should note cable paths on your

floor plan.

The customer is responsible for planning for the installation of interconnecting

cables, including the proper lightning and surge protection as necessary and should

contact the appropriate contractor for guidance and assistance as required.

General considerations

In preparing for cabling, consider the following:

v Where applicable, electrical and physical specifications of cables that you

currently have and plan to use with the N series storage system must be

compatible with the standards mentioned in this manual. If no standard is

specifically mentioned in this manual, the standards for the interface on that

adapter must be met.

v Lengths and paths of cables.

v Communication signal cables should be installed away from power lines or other

sources of electrical interference.

v Labeling of cables and ports you currently have in order to indicate which

devices you want attached to them.

v Electrostatic discharge (ESD) considerations. In particular, unprotected patch

panels, punch blocks, or other intermediate routing or switching devices used in

cabling can allow ESD into the network.

Note: Lightning protection must be provided on any cable that travels outside of

the building in which the system or devices are installed. Contact a cabling

vendor about providing lightning protection for those cables. Fiber-optic

cables do not require lightning protection.

The following cabling is required:

1. Power cables for power supplies and rack power distribution.

2. Category 5 or better copper Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors.

3. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fiber Ethernet ports.

4. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fibre Channel ports.

5. LVD SCSI cable for optional direct SCSI-attached tape backup. The connector

on the rear of the N series storage system is a VHDCI mini 68–pin connector.

6. If clustering, Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables are available for N5000

series and N7000 series models and can be ordered in the following lengths

and types:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 113

Page 144: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 80. Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables

Description Machine Model Feature

2m Copper Cluster

4X IB cable

2864, 2865 , 2866,

2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21/G21 1037

5m Copper Cluster

4X IB cable

2864, 2865, 2866,

2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21/G21 1038

10m Copper Cluster

4X IB cable

2864, 2865, 2866,

2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21/G21 1039

5m Fiber Cluster 4X

IB cable

2864, 2865, 2866,

2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21/G21 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4X

IB cable

2864, 2865, 2866,

2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21/G21 1041

Copper-Fiber

Converter

2864, 2865, 2866,

2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21/G21 1042

Cable measuring

Accurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Do

not guess or estimate your cable lengths.

Some cable lengths are fixed. For example, the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect

cables are fixed length cables that restrict the physical distance of the cluster nodes

in the rack. The power cords, depending on the feature code, are also of fixed

lengths.

For the Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling, consider the following:

1. Cabling that exits the N series storage system is typically run in a cable

management tray, included with the N series storage system.

2. Avoid sharp bends and do not route cables near rack doors to avoid crimping

cables.

3. Account for raised floor height, if appropriate.

Cable labeling

Cable labels can be used to organize your cabling. The fields on a cable label are:

Room The room number, or other information about the

physical location of the device.

Person The name of the person who uses the device.

Telephone # The nearest telephone number to the device.

Device type This could be a printer, plotter, TTY, or similar

device.

Device ID The device ID is determined when the software is

configured on the system.

Software location code The software location code is the link between the

hardware and software. This code appears in the

software configuration menus and in the hardware

diagnostic menus.

114 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 145: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: For specific location code information, refer

to the Diagnostic Information manual for your

system.

Adapter type The adapter type number is located on a label

attached to the end of the adapter.

Note: Some of the adapters do not have an

adapter type.

Interface Name of the asynchronous adapters, and some

network adapters, generally includes the name of

the interface. For example, Ethernet LAN or Fibre

Channel SAN.

EIA Used in a rack-type system unit to identify the

physical location of the drawer within the rack. The

label along the right side of the rack (with rear

cover open) indicates numbers from 1, at the

bottom, to 32, at the top of the rack. The number at

the bottom-right corner of the drawer is the EIA

location for this drawer.

Slot Physical position within the system unit or drawer

where the adapter is located. Each adapter slot is

identified by a single digit number. Usually, the

number is embossed in the adapter mounting

frame.

Connector Connector number on the adapter. Most adapters

have only one connector, so this number is 1.

Tailgate The number of the tailgate connector to which this

cable is attached if tailgates are used.

System ID If an installation has more than one system unit,

each one must be identified to prevent connecting

devices to the wrong system unit. The customer

determines the System ID.

Connecting expansion units to filers

This section describes the requirements for connecting an expansion unit to N

series filer storage systems and other expansion units. For detailed instructions

about how to install and connect one or more expansion units in a rack, or to

connect an expansion unit to your filer storage system, refer to Chapter 2, “IBM N

series hardware features,” on page 7.

v IBM strongly recommends using optical (Fibre Channel) cabling whenever

possible.

v Refer to Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 7 for details about

the maximum number of drive loops, maximum number of expansion units or

hard disk drives per loop, maximum total storage capacity, and maximum total

number of hard disk drives for configurations using your N series filer storage

system. (For example, you can connect a maximum of one loop of three fully

populated expansion units to an N3700.)

v Multipath looping is recommended for all configurations to provide additional

redundancy. This includes single or dual controller and single or multiple

expansion units.

Chapter 5. Cable planning 115

Page 146: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v Do not mix Fibre Channel EXN2000s/EXN4000s and SATA EXN1000 expansion

units in the same loop.

v EXN4000 and EXN2000 expansion units can be mixed within the same loop, but

the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to the same

speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps).

Note: One optical cable feature code order provides two cables. One SFP feature

code order provides two SFPs.

Expansion unit cabling requirements (filers only)

You must meet the cabling requirements discussed in the following sections when

connecting the expansion unit to an N series filer storage system or to other

expansion units.

Note: N series gateways do not support the attachment of N series EXN disk

expansion units.

For the latest information on cabling requirements, see Installation and Setup

Instructions and the Hardware and Service Guide for your storage system.

Connecting the expansion unit directly to the N series filer

storage system

When connecting the expansion unit to an N series filer storage system, you must

use appropriate cables and connectors according to the following guidelines.

v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with early CPU module

designs: Use a NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable (#2020 or 2022). For

attachment to an N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper

cable is required. For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP Fibre

Channel copper cables are required.

v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with current CPU module

designs: Use an LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs for

attachment to an N3700 Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical

cables and four SFPs for attachment to an N3700 Model A20.

v For direct connections to all other N series filer storage systems: Use

LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and SFPs.

Note: For information about the differences between early and late CPU module

designs, see “Understanding the differences between early and current

N3700 CPU modules” on page 14.

Connecting the expansion unit to other expansion units

When connecting an expansion unit to other expansion units, IBM strongly

recommends using two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs (two

SFPs per LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable).

Note: SFP-to-SFP Fibre Channel copper cables may also be used for connections

(to a maximum of three meters) between expansion units.

You must order one cable feature code and two SFP feature codes per expansion

unit.

Connecting a gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre

Channel SAN.

116 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 147: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for

your N5000 series or N7000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Chapter 5. Cable planning 117

Page 148: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

118 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 149: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 6. AutoSupport

AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featured in the Data

ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems that

continuously monitors the health of your system. It keeps a watchful eye on a

multitude of preset conditions, automatically sending a status message to IBM

Technical Support, and your system administrator if desired, for immediate action to

correct potential problems. AutoSupport makes sure that your storage environment

is working at top efficiency.

How does AutoSupport work?

The AutoSupport feature triggers the automatic sending of notification messages to

IBM Service and Support. AutoSupport also has the ability to send notification

messages to one or more customer-specified e-mail addresses which can alert

recipients to potential problems with the N series storage system. As necessary,

IBM Service and Support will contact customers based on the contact information in

the customer’s record for resolution of potential system problems.

Note: After an occurrence of an event, an AutoSupport notification is sent to IBM

Service and Support via HTTPS by a direct connection to the predefined

location specified in Data ONTAP.

AutoSupport is enabled by default with Data ONTAP 7.1.1 or later when you

configure your N series storage system for the first time.

IBM strongly encourages customers to enable AutoSupport. AutoSupport enables

the IBM System Storage N series machines to send diagnostic information back to

IBM when error conditions are encountered within the machines. AutoSupport can

be enabled via the command line interface via the following command:

options autosupport.enable on

AutoSupport can also be enabled via the FilerView Web browser user interface by

selecting Filer � Configure AutoSupport in the left-hand navigation frame, and

then selecting Yes from the drop-down list box next to “AutoSupport Enabled.”

On later versions of Data ONTAP, AutoSupport is enabled by default when you

configure your N series storage system for the first time. After a grace period of 24

hours, AutoSupport messages start being generated.

Note: You can disable AutoSupport at any time using the autosupport.enable

option, but you are strongly advised to leave it enabled.

Interaction with mail hosts

N series storage systems do not function as mail hosts, they rely on another host at

the customer site that listens on the SMTP port (25) to send mail to the

customer-specified e-mail addresses. AutoSupport requires at least one host

reachable by an N series storage system that runs an SMTP server or a mail

forwarder, such as the sendmail program.

Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messages

The subject line of the e-mail messages sent by the AutoSupport mechanism

contains a text string that identifies the reason for the notification. The subject also

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 119

Page 150: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

contains a relative prioritization of the message, using syslog severity levels from

DEBUG to EMERGENCY. The messages and other information in the notification

should be used to check on the problem being reported.

The format of the subject line is as follows:

System Notification from (message)

Short e-mail messages for urgent events

Customers can specify up to five addresses of e-mail recipients in which the N

series storage systems can send a short alert notification containing only the reason

for the alert to these recipients. The short e-mail messages contain the reason for

the notification in the subject line and note the time of failure. These messages are

triggered only by specific urgent events. This feature is useful for system

administrators who read e-mail messages on alphanumeric pagers.

Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messages

Customers can specify up to five e-mail recipient addresses for standard

AutoSupport notification.

Technical Support response

When IBM Technical Support receives an alert AutoSupport notification, it takes

corrective action to resolve the problems. IBM Technical Support initiates a case

and then contacts the customer to further investigate the situation or to provide a

corrective action to the customer.

Cluster considerations

The AutoSupport notification messages from a N series storage system in a cluster

are different from the AutoSupport notification messages from a standalone N series

storage system in the following ways:

v The subject line in the AutoSupport messages from a filer in a cluster reads

“Cluster notification” instead of “System notification.”

v The AutoSupport messages from a N series storage system in a cluster contain

information about the N series storage system’s partner, such as the partner

system ID and the partner host name.

v In takeover mode, if you reboot the live N series storage system, two

AutoSupport messages are sent to notify the e-mail recipients of the reboot. The

live N series storage system sends one message; the failed N series storage

system sends the other message.

v The live N series storage system sends an AutoSupport message after it

completes the takeover process.

120 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 151: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes

This appendix discusses how to determine the power line lengths running from your

N series storage system to the power source.

Recommended AC power line sizes

Longer AC power feeds need to be properly designed to preserve voltage levels to

the equipment. The wiring from the breaker panel to the power strip, which supplies

power to your N series storage system and expansion units, can often exceed 50

feet.

Note: Total AC wire length = breaker to wall or ceiling outlet + extension cable or

ceiling drop.

The following tables list the recommended conductor size for 2% voltage drop for a

particular distance in feet (taken from the Radio Engineer’s Handbook).

Table 81. 110V, single phase recommended conductor sizes

110V,

single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit

25 feet 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 8 AWG

50 feet 8 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG

75 feet 6 AWG 4 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG

Table 82. 220V, single phase recommended conductor sizes

220V,

single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit

25 feet 14 AWG 12 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG

50 feet 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 8 AWG

75 feet 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG

The following table lists the approximate equivalent wire gauge (American Wire

Gauge (AWG) to Harmonized Cordage).

Table 83. American Wire Gage to Harmonized Cordage equivalents

AWG 8 10 12

Harmonized, mm-mm

1 4.0 2.5 1.5

1 mm-mm = millimeter squared

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 121

Page 152: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

122 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 153: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems

This appendix contains information about FRU/CRUs and power cords for N series

products.

FRU/CRU list for N series products

For the most current FRU/CRU list for your N series product, see the following Web

site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Power cord list for N series products

The following list details the power cord feature codes (FCs) for N series products.

FC 9000 (All countries)

Power cord, Rack PDU

v 27 inches

v Rated 250 V/15 A

v Product end uses C14; PDU end uses C13.

FC 9001 Europe and others

Provides power cords for Austria, Belgium, Bolivia, Bulgaria, Chile, Croatia,

Czech Republic, Egypt, Estonia, European Union, Finland, France,

Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania,

Luxemburg, Morocco, Netherlands, Norway, Peru, Poland, Portugal,

Romania, Russia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Turkey

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 211 (CEE 7-VII) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9002 United Kingdom and others

Provides power cords for United Kingdom, Costa Rica, Cyprus, Guyana,

Hong Kong, Ireland, Kuwait, Malta, Oman, Singapore, Sri Lanka

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 210 (13A fuse) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9003 Japan

Provides power cords for Japan

v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.

v Attached plug EL 302 (JIS C3306) designed for 100-110 V ac input.

FC 9004 U.S., Six Feet (2 m)

Provides power cords for U.S., Canada, Mexico, Belize, Columbia, Ecuador,

El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Korea, Nicaragua, Panama, Philippines,

Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Venezuela

v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.

v Attached plug EL 302 (Nema 5-15P) designed for 100-120 V ac input.

FC 9005 Australia, New Zealand

Provides power cords for Australia, New Zealand, Uruguay

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 206 (AS 3112) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 123

Page 154: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

FC 9006 Switzerland, Liechtenstein

Provides power cords for Switzerland, Liechtenstein

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 203 (SEV 1011) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9007 Argentina

Provides power cords for Argentina

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 219 (IRAM 2073) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9008 China

Provides power cords for China

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 602 (GB 2099/GB 1002) designed for 200-240 V ac

input.

FC 9009 Denmark

Provides power cords for Denmark

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 213 (DHCR 107-2-D1) designed for 200-240 V ac

input.

FC 9010 India, Pakistan, South Africa

Provides power cords for India, Macau, Pakistan, South Africa

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 208 (BS 164-1, BS 546) designed for 200-240 V ac

input.

FC 9011 Israel

Provides power cords for Israel

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 212 (SI 32) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9012 Italy

Provides power cords for Italy

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 502 (CEI 23-16) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9013 North America (250 V)

Provides power cords for U.S.

v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/15 A.

v Attached plug EL 309 (NEMA 6-15P) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9014 Brazil

Provides power cords for Brazil

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 211 (NBR 6147/2000) designed for 200-240 V ac input

FC 9015 Taiwan

Provides 125 V power cords for Taiwan

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.

v Attached plug EL 302 (CNS 10917-3) designed for 100-120 V ac input.

FC 9016 Taiwan (250 V)

Provides 250 V power cords for Taiwan

v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

124 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 155: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v Attached plug EL 610 (CNS 10917, CNS 690) designed for 250 V ac

input.

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems 125

Page 156: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

126 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 157: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix C. IBM N series worksheets

This appendix contains the following IBM N series worksheets:

v “N3300 and N3600 system setup worksheet”

v “N3700 system setup worksheet” on page 129

v “N3700 cluster system setup worksheet” on page 130

v “N5000 series system setup information worksheet” on page 131

v “N7000 series system setup information worksheet” on page 132

N3300 and N3600 system setup worksheet

The following worksheet is for initial basic setup of your N3300 or N3600 system.

Table 84. System setup worksheet

Setup Parameters Node A (top node)

Node B (bottom

node)

Hostname:

Network Configuration Information for e0a

Virtual interfaces: [Y/N]

IP address for e0a

Netmask for e0a

Should interface e0a take over partner IP

address during failover? [Y/N]

IP address or interface name to be taken

over by e0a:

Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx, auto

[100/1000])

Flow control (none, receive, send, full):

Enable jumbo frames? [Y/N]

Network Configuration Information for e0b

IP address for e0b

Netmask for e0b

Should interface e0b take over partner IP

address during failover? [Y/N]

IP address or interface name to be taken

over by e0b:

Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx, auto

[100/1000])

Flow control (none, receive, send, full):

Enable jumbo frames? [Y/N]

Complete setup through the Web interface?

[Y/N]

Default Gateway IP Address

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 127

Page 158: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 84. System setup worksheet (continued)

Setup Parameters Node A (top node)

Node B (bottom

node)

Administration Host Connection Setup Note: The administration host is given

root access to the filer's /etc files for

system administration. To allow access to

/etc root access to all NFS clients, enter

RETURN below.

Name or IP address of the administration

host

Timezone (name of city or region in /etc/zoneinfo

file) [EST5EDT]

Filer location

Enter the root directory for HTTP files

[/vol/vol0/home/http]

Do you want to run DNS resolver? [Y/N]

DNS domain name (You can enter up to three nameservers.)

IP address for DNS first nameserver

Do you want another nameserver? [Y/N]

IP address for alternate nameserver

Do you want another nameserver? [Y/N]

IP address for alternate nameserver

Do you want to run NIS client? [Y/N] (default is

N)

The Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) provides remote management capabilities

including console redirection, logging, and power control. It also extends Autosupport by

sending down filer event alerts.

Would you like to configure the BMC?

[Y/N] (default is Y)

Enable DHCP on the BMC LAN interface?

[Y/N] (default is N)

IP address for the BMC

Netmask for the BMC

IP address for the BMC Gateway

Gratuitous ARP interval for the BMC [10

sec (max 60)]

The mail host is required by your system to enable BMC to sense ASUP messages when

the filer is down.

IP address or name of the mail host

IP address for the mail host

You may use Autosupport options to configure alert destinations.

128 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 159: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N3700 system setup worksheet

The following worksheet is for initial basic setup of your N3700 system, where no

additional software is licensed. See the IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP

Software Setup Guide for your version of Data ONTAP for a worksheet for systems

that have additional licensed software.

Table 85. N3700 system setup worksheet

Do you want to configure Ethernet

virtual interfaces?

The default is set to No for most installations.

Network configuration: First interface Second interface

IP address:

Netmask:

Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx,

auto [100/1000]):

Flow control (none, receive, send,

full):

Enable jumbo frames?

IP Address or name of default

gateway:

Would you like to continue setup

through Web interface? (You do

this through the Setup Wizard.)

(Yes means you want to use a Web interface.)

IP address or name of

administration host:

(Leave blank to allow root user access to /etc from any NFS client)

Where is filer located? (Text string)

Do you want to run DNS resolver?

Do you want to run NIS client?

Host name:

Appendix C. IBM N series worksheets 129

Page 160: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N3700 cluster system setup worksheet

This worksheet is a planning aid for setting up clustered N3700 systems.

Table 86. N3700 cluster system setup worksheet

Setup parameters Node A Node B

Host name:

Network configuration information

Virtual interfaces:

IP address—first interface, e0a:

IP address—second interface, e0b:

Netmask—first interface, e0a:

Netmask—second interface, e0b:

Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx,

auto [100/1000])—first interface,

e0a:

Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx,

auto [100/1000])—second interface,

e0b:

Flow control (none, receive, send,

full)—e0a:

Flow control (none, receive, send,

full)—e0b:

Enable jumbo frames?—first

interface, e0a:

Enable jumbo frames?—second

interface, e0b:

IP address or name of default

gateway:

IP address or name of

administration host: (Leave blank

for root access to /etc from any

NFS client)

Where is the N series system

located? (Text string)

Do you want to run DNS resolver?

Do you want to run NIS client?

130 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 161: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N5000 series system setup information worksheet

The following worksheet is for initial basic setup of your N5000 series system.

Table 87. N5000 series systems setup worksheet

Hostname:

Network Configuration Information e0a e0b e0c e0d

IP addresses: First 3 #s______._____._____

Netmask:

Should interface XXX take over a partner IP address

during failover?

Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx, auto [100/1000])

Flow control (none, receive, send, full):

Enable jumbo frames?

IP address or name of default gateway:

IP address or name of administration host: (Leave

blank for root access to /etc from any NFS client)

Where is the N5200 or N5500 system located? (Text

string)

Do you want to run DNS resolver?

Do you want to run NIS client?

Would you like to configure the RLM LAN interface

[y]?

RLM IP address

RLM Netmask

RLM Gateway IP Address

Would you like to enable DHCP on the RLM LAN

interface [y]?

Please enter the name or IP address of the mail host:

Appendix C. IBM N series worksheets 131

Page 162: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N7000 series system setup information worksheet

You need the following information to complete the setup script for your N7000

series system.

Table 88. N7000 series systems setup worksheet

Hostname:

Network Configuration Information e0a e0b e0c e0d e0e e0f

IP addresses: First 3 #s

______._____._____

Netmask:

Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx, auto

[100/1000])

Flow control (none, receive, send, full):

Enable jumbo frames?

IP address or name of default gateway:

IP address or name of administration host:

(Leave blank for root access to /etc from any

NFS client)

Where is the NAS system located? (Text

string)

Do you want to run DNS resolver?

Do you want to run NIS client?

Would you like to configure the RLM LAN

interface [y]?

RLM IP address

RLM Netmask

RLM Gateway IP Address

Would you like to enable DHCP on the RLM

LAN interface [y]?

Enter the name or IP address of the mail host:

132 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 163: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix D. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks

This chapter provides requirements and specifications for 19″ racks used by the N

series storage system.

2101 Model N00 rack specifications

Dimensions

Height 1804 mm 71.0 in.

Capacity 36 EIA Units

With PDP - DC only 1926 mm 75.8 in.

Width without side

panels

623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 650 mm 25.6 in.

Depth with rear door

only installed

1042 mm 41.0 in.

Depth with front and rear

door installed

1098 mm 43.3 in.

System p (sculptured)

style front door

1147 mm 45.2 in.

Weight

Base rack 244 kg 535 lbs

Full rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 137.

Electrical² (sum specified values for

drawers or enclosures in rack)

DC rack

Power source loading

maximum in kVA³

8.4

Voltage range (V dc) -40 to -60

AC rack

Power source loading

maximum in kVA (per

PDU)⁴

4.8

Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240

Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60

Temperature

requirements

(see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Humidity requirements (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Clearances Front Back Left Right

Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on

page 135). Refer to the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 133

Page 164: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a

maximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit).

2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack.

3. The Power Distribution Panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source) 48 volt 20 to 50

amp circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kVA.

Note: Because the N series storage system is an ac-only power unit, it is not recommended that the N series storage system

be installed in a dc-only rack.

4. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawers

mounted in the rack.

5. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output and

provide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.

7014 Rack specifications

Model T00 rack

Dimensions

Height 1804 mm 71.0 in.

Capacity 36 EIA Units

With PDP - DC only 1926 mm 75.8 in.

Width without side

panels

623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 644 mm 25.4 in.

Depth with rear door

only

1042 mm 41.0 in.

Depth with rear door and

RS/6000® style front

door

1098 mm 43.3 in.

System p (sculptured)

style front door

1147 mm 45.2 in.

Weight

Base rack 244 kg 535 lbs

Full rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 137.

Electrical² (sum specified values for

drawers or enclosures in rack)

DC rack

Power source loading

maximum in kVA³

8.4

Voltage range (V dc) -40 to -60

AC rack

Power source loading

maximum in kVA (per

PDU)⁴

4.8

Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240

Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60

Temperature

requirements

(see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Humidity requirements (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Clearances Front Back Left Right

Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on

page 135). Refer to the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.)

134 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 165: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a

maximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit).

2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack.

3. The Power Distribution Panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source) 48 volt 20 to 50

amp circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kVA.

Note: Because the N series storage system is an ac-only power unit, it is not recommended that the N series storage system

be installed in a dc-only rack.

4. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawers

mounted in the rack.

5. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output and

provide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.

Model T42 Rack

Dimensions

Height 2015 mm 79.3 in.

Capacity 42 EIA Units

With PDP - DC only Not applicable

Width without side panels 623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 644 mm 25.4 in.

Depth with rear door only 1042 mm 41.0 in.

Depth with rear door and RS/6000 style

front door

1098 mm 43.3 in.

System p (sculptured) style front door 1147 mm 45.2 in.

Weight

Base rack 261 kg 575 lbs

Full rack¹ 930 kg 2045 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page

137.

Service clearance Recommended minimum vertical service clearance from floor is 2439 mm or 8 feet.

All other specifications For all other technical information, see “Model T00 rack” on page 134.

T00 and T42 service clearances and caster location

The service clearances and caster locations are shown in Figure 5 on page 136:

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 135

Page 166: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: Rack units are large and heavy and are not easily moved. Because

maintenance activities require access at both the front and back, extra room

needs to be allowed. The footprint shows the radius of the swinging doors on

the I/O rack. The Figure 6 shows the minimum space required.

T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments

2474 mm (97.4 in.)

2921 mm(115 in.)915 mm

(36 in.)915 mm(36 in.)

915 mm (36 in.)

915 mm (36 in.)

Front

CasterLocation

Front coverthickness58 mm (2.4 in.)

Rear coverthickness20 mm (0.8 in.)

Side coverthickness 2x10 mm (0.4 in.)

(4.8)121

(3.1)

80

Cable opening310 mm (12.2 in.)x 50 mm (2 in.)

Figure 5. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks.

Separation25.4 mm(1 in.)

T00or

T42Rack

T00or

T42Rack

Figure 6. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments

136 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 167: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

T00 racks and T42 racks can be bolted together in a multiple rack arrangement as

shown above. A kit is available including the bolts, spacers, and decorative trim

pieces to cover the 25.4 mm (1 in.) space. For service clearances, see the service

clearances as shown in the table for the “Model T00 rack” on page 134.

T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading

The T00 and T42 racks can be extremely heavy when several drawers are present.

The following table shows the necessary weight distribution distances for the T00

and T42 racks when it is loaded.

Rack System

weight (1)

lbs (kg)

Width (2)

in. (mm)

Depth (2)

in. (mm)

Weight distribution distance (3)

Front & back

in. (mm)

Left & right

in. (mm)

7014-T00

(4)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8

(477.5)

18.4 (467.4)

7014-T00

(5)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8

(477.5)

0.0 (0.0)

7014-T00

(6)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8

(477.5)

22 (559)

7014-T42

(4)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8

(477.5)

18.4 (467.4)

7014-T42

(5)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8

(477.5)

0.0 (0.0)

7014-T42

(6)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8

(477.5)

27 (686)

The following table shows the necessary floor-loading specifications for the T00 and

T42 racks when it is loaded.

Rack Floor loading

Raised kg/m2 Non-raised kg/m2 Raised lbs/ft2 Non-raised lbs/ft2

7014-T00 (4) 366.7 322.7 75 66

7014-T00 (5) 734.5 690.6 150.4 141.4

7014-T00 (6) 341 297 70 61

7014-T42 (4) 403 359 82.5 73.5

7014-T42 (5) 825 781 169 160

7014-T42 (6) 341.4 297.5 70 61

The following notes are for both of the preceding tables.

Notes:

1. For maximum weight of fully populated rack, units are lbs with kg in

parentheses.

2. For dimensions without covers, units are inches with mm in parentheses.

3. The weight distribution distance in all four directions is the area around the rack

perimeter (minus covers) necessary to distribute the weight beyond the

perimeter of the rack. Weight distribution areas cannot overlap with adjacent

computer equipment weight distribution areas. Units are inches with mm in

parentheses.

4. Weight distribution distance is 1/2 the service clearance values shown in the

figure plus cover thickness.

5. No left and right weight distribution distance.

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 137

Page 168: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

6. Left and right weight distribution distance required for a 70 lbs/ft2 raised floor

loading objective.

Rack specifications

All racks used for N series storage system installation must conform to the

specifications in this section. Both the IBM 7014 (Model T00 and Model T42) and

the IBM 2101 Model N00 racks conform, but some other racks, including a few from

IBM do not.

v The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks.

The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide + 0.75 mm (17.75 in. + 0.03 in.),

and the rail-mounting holes must be 465 mm + 0.8 mm (18.3 in. + 0.03 in.) apart

on center (horizontal width between vertical columns of holes on the two

front-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges). Rail-mounting

holes must be 7.1 mm + 0.1 mm (0.28 in. + 0.004 in.) in diameter.

The vertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of 3 holes

spaced (from bottom to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and 12.67

mm (0.5 in.) on center (making each 3-hole set of vertical hole spacing 44.45

mm (1.75 in.) apart on center).

Rear, No Door

Front, No Door

571mm (22.50 in.)

203mm (8.0 in.)

719mm (28.31 in.)

51mm (2.01 in.)

451mm (17.76 in.)

494mm (19.45 in.)

Drawer Rail

Mounting Flanges494mm (19.45 in.)

Figure 7. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions

138 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 169: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Figure 8. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view

6.75mm min

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

450 +/- 0.75mm

Rack Front Opening

465 +/- 0.8mm

Rack Mounting Holes Center-to-CenterHole Diameter =

7.1 +/- 0.1mm

6.75mm min

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

Bottom Front of Rack

EIA

Ho

leSp

ac

ing

Figure 9. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 139

Page 170: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an average load of 15.9 kg

(35 lbs) of product weight per EIA unit.

For example, a 4-EIA drawer will have a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg (140

lbs).

v Only ac power drawers are supported in the rack or cabinet. It is strongly

recommended that you use a power distribution unit (PDU) that meets the same

specifications as IBM PDUs to supply rack power. Each Power Distribution Bus

installed in a rack requires a dedicated power line of 200 to 240 V ac and 30 A.

Rack or cabinet power distribution devices must meet the drawer power

requirements, as well as that of any additional products that will be connected to

the same power distribution device.

The rack or cabinet power receptacle (PDU, UPS or multi-outlet strip) must have

a compatible plug type for your drawer or device.

Note: Refer to the sales manual for 7014 or 2101 racks if you want to use PDUs

that are designed for 7014 or 2101 racks. The customer is responsible for

ensuring that the PDU is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumes

responsibility for any and all agency certifications required.

v The rack or cabinet must be compatible with drawer mounting rails, including a

secure and snug fit of the rail-mounting pins and screws into the rack or cabinet

rail support hole.

Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes, a plug-in hole adapter may be

required. The plug-in hole adapters are NOT part of the N series rail

mounting kit included with every N series machine.

The rails provided with the N series storage system have been designed and

tested to safely support the weight of your drawer or device. The rails also

provide rear tie-down brackets.

The front and rear mounting flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3

in.) apart and the internal width bounded by the mounting flanges at least 494

mm (19.45 in.), for the IBM rails to fit in your rack or cabinet (see figure, Top

View of non-IBM Rack Specifications Dimensions on page Figure 7 on page

138).

v The rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed both in the

front and rear of the rack, or have another means of preventing the rack or

cabinet from tipping while the drawer or device is installed or removed.

Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securely

bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and

heavy row of racks or cabinets. Refer to the Rack Installation Guide for the 7014

or 2101 and the individual drawer installation guides for additional information.

v There must be adequate front and rear service clearances (in and around the

rack or cabinet).

The rack or cabinet must have sufficient horizontal width clearance in the front

and rear to allow the drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, the

rear service access positions (typically this requires 914.4 mm (36 in.) clearance

in both the front and rear).

If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to provide

unrestrained access for service or be easily removable. If doors must be

removed for service, it is the customer’s responsibility to remove them prior to

service.

v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate clearance around the rack drawer.

140 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 171: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can be

opened and closed, according to the product specifications (refer to the 7014 or

2101 Rack Installation Guides and the individual drawer installation guides).

Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203

mm (8 in.) rear, door-to-mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front,

571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side clearance for drawer bezels and cables (see

Figure 7 on page 138).

v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate front-to-back ventilation.

For optimum ventilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not have a front

door. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so that

there is proper front-to-back airflow to maintain the required drawer ambient inlet

temperature between 10 °C and 40 °C (50 °F and 104 °F), with an ideal 22 °C

(72 °F), inside the rack. The perforations must yield 34% minimum open area per

square inch.

General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM

rack

v Any product or component that plugs into either an IBM Power Distribution Unit

(PDU) or main power (using a power cord), or uses any voltage over 42 V ac

must be Safety Certified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) for

the country in which it will be installed.

Some of the items that require safety certification may include: the rack or

cabinet (if it contains electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fan

trays, PDU, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), multi-outlet strips, or any other

products installed in the rack or cabinet that connect to hazardous voltage.

Examples of OSHA-approved NRTLs for the USA:

– UL

– ETL

– CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark)

Examples of approved NRTLs for Canada:

– UL (Ulc mark)

– ETL (ETLc mark)

– CSA

The European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer’s Declaration of

Conformity (DOC).

Certified products should have the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on the

product or product label. However, proof of certification must be made available

to IBM upon request. Proof consists of such items as copies of the NRTL license

or certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply the NRTL mark,

the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in an NRTL

publication, or a copy of the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain the

manufacturer’s name, product type and model, standard to which it was certified,

the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number, and a list of

any Conditions of Acceptance or Deviations. A Manufacturer’s Declaration is not

proof of certification by an NRTL.

v The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legal

requirements for the country in which it is installed.

The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as voltages over 60

V dc or 42 V ac, energy over 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch points, or

hot surfaces).

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 141

Page 172: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device for each

product in the rack, including any PDU.

A disconnect device may consist of either the plug on the power cord (if the

power cord is no longer than 6 feet), the inlet receptacle (if the power cord is of a

detachable type), or a power on/off switch, or an Emergency Power Off switch on

the rack, provided all power is removed from the rack or product by the

disconnect device.

If the rack or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights), the

rack must have an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device.

v The rack or cabinet, PDU and Multi-Outlet Strips, and products installed in the

rack or cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer facility ground.

There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the PDU or

rack plug and any touchable metal or conductive surface on the rack and on the

products installed in the rack. Grounding method must comply with applicable

country’s electric code (such as NEC or CEC). Ground continuity can be verified

by your IBM service personnel, after the installation is completed, and should be

verified prior to the first service activity.

v The voltage rating of the PDU and multi-outlet strips must be compatible with the

products plugged into them.

The current and power ratings for the PDU or multi-outlet strips must be at least

1.25 times the sum of the ratings of the products that will plug into it. The current

rating of the PDU or multi-outlet strip must be less than 0.80 of the rating for the

building supply circuit (as required by the NEC and CEC). Example: A PDU rating

of 12A for a 15A wall breaker, and sum of product ratings does not exceed 9.6A.

If a UPS is installed, it must meet all the above electrical safety requirements as

described for a PDU (including certification by an NRTL).

v The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or

cabinet must be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions, and in

accordance with all national, state or province, and local codes and laws.

The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or

cabinet must be used as intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer’s

product documentation and marketing literature).

v All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, and

all products in the rack or cabinet, including safety information, must be available

on-site.

v If there is more than one source of power in the rack or cabinet, there must be

clearly visible safety labels for ″Multiple Power Source″ (in the languages

required for the country in which the product is installed).

v If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety or weight

labels applied by the manufacturer, they must be intact and translated into the

languages required for the country in which the product is installed.

v If the rack or cabinet has doors, the rack becomes a fire enclosure by definition

and must meet the applicable flammability ratings (V-0 or better). Totally metal

enclosures at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) thick are considered to comply.

Nonenclosure (decorative) materials must have a flammability rating of V-1 or

better. If glass is used (such as in rack doors) it must be safety glass. If wood

shelves are used in the rack or cabinet, they must be treated with a UL Listed

flame-retardant coating.

v The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all IBM requirements for ″safe

to service″ (contact your IBM Installation Planning Representative if in doubt).

There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for service.

142 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 173: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Elevated service installations, where the products to be serviced are installed

between 1.5 m and 3.7 m (5 ft and 12 ft) above the floor, require the availability

of an OSHA- and CSA-approved nonconductive step ladder. If a ladder is

required for service, the customer must supply the OSHA- and CSA-approved

nonconductive step ladder (unless other arrangements have been made with the

local IBM Service Branch Office). Products installed over 2.9 m (12 ft) above the

floor require a Special Bid to be completed before they can be serviced by IBM

service personnel.

For products not intended for rack-mounting to be serviced by IBM, the products

and parts that will be replaced as part of that service must not weigh over 11.4

kg (25 lbs) (contact your Installation Planning Representative if in doubt).

There must not be any special education or training required for safe servicing of

any of the products installed in the racks (contact your Installation Planning

Representative if in doubt).

v Any rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed, or have

another means of preventing the rack or cabinet from tipping during product

operation or service.

Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securely

bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and

heavy row of racks or cabinets.

v It is strongly recommended that the mounting rails that are shipped with the

product be used to install it in the rack.

The mounting rails that ship with IBM products have been designed and tested to

safely support the product during operation and service activities. The mounting

rails used on products to be serviced by IBM must be certified for use with the

products by an NRTL to all applicable country safety standards.

Note: IBM requires that mounting rails must be able to support four times the

maximum rated product weight in its worst-case position (fully extended

front and rear positions) for 1 full minute without catastrophic failure.

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 143

Page 174: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

144 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 175: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N3600.

Note: The N3300 does not support optional adapter cards.

Table 89. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical)

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment

1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)

1024 Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment

1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed one.

For the dual-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two.

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to

the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)

Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This

adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275m

using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.

For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)

Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter

supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This

adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100m

using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.

For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)

Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter

auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching

"back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The

Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style

connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 145

Page 176: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 90. Dual-port 4 Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.

For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)

Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.

This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter

supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 91. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.

For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)

Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE)

adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSI

hosts.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.

For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024)

Feature code 1024 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel host bus adapter (HBA)

designed to support connection to a tape device. The adapter includes two 68-pin

VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Two SCSI LVD two-meter

cables (for connecting to the tape device) are included. These cables have 68-pin

VHDCI connectors on each end.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.

For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

146 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 177: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)

Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that provides

two Ethernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.

For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching disk expansion

units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This

adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form

factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable

lengths:

Table 92. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum

cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.

For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 147

Page 178: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

148 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 179: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and

N5500 systems

The N5200 and N5500 support a variety of optional adapter cards.

Table 93. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 models

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1003 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical)

1004 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1005 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment

1006 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateways and

MetroCluster filer configurations)

1007 Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1008 Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) (optical)

1009 Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper)

1010 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1011 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)

1016 SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter

1018 Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only)

1019 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA

1020 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1027 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1034 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N5200

and N5500:

1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1004, 1005, 1006, 1018,

1019, 1027, and 1034)

2. Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapters (FC 1010 and 1011)

3. Ethernet Network Interface Cards (FC 1003, 1007, 1008, 1009, and 1020)

4. SCSI Dual-channel Ultra320 LVD adapter for tape attachment (FC 1016)

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to

the IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003)

Feature code 1003 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet network interface card. The

adapter supports 10000BASE-SX network topologies. The adapter has two LC

duplex connectors and supports 50- micron and 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre

(MMF). The maximum cable distance is 550 meters using 50-micron MMF and 275

m using 62.5-micron MMF.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter

is six.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 149

Page 180: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority for this adapter is slots 3, 4

and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority for this adapter is slots

1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004)

Feature code 1004 is a dual-port 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA interface for disk

storage expansion unit (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) attachment. FC 1004

is used on all models of the N5200 and N5500 filers (A10 and A20) for attaching

EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000 disk storage expansion units.

This adapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50-micron or

62.5-micron multi-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps.

The maximum cable distances supported are:

Table 94. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004) - maximum cable

lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For

dual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For single-node models (A10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is

slots 2, 3 and 4. For dual-node models (A20), the slot priority order for installing this

adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005)

Feature code 1005 is a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA interface for tape connectivity.

This adapter is a 64-bit 133MHx 2 Gbps Fibre Channel adapter. It auto-negotiates

to 2 and 1 Gbps. The adapter has two LC style connectors and supports 50-micron

and 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre.

This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths:

Table 95. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) - maximum cable

lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter

is six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for this adapter is slots

4, 3 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the slot priority order for this

adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

150 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 181: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and

MetroCluster filer) (FC 1006)

Feature code 1006 is a 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment. This

adapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50 micron or 62.5 micron

multi-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps.

The maximum cable distances supported are:

Table 96. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster filer)

(FC 1006) - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

This adapter is used for two purposes:

v On N5200 and N5500 gateway models (G10 and G20), this adapter is used for

attaching N5200 or N5500 storage controllers directly to back-end disk systems

or to Fibre Channel switches, which are then connected to back-end disk

systems.

v In a fabric MetroCluster environment, this adapter is used for attaching dual-node

N5200 and N5500 filer models (A20) to the Fibre Channel switches that are used

in a fabric MetroCluster configuration. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, FC

1018 (Dual-port MetroCluster HBA) is also required.

For single-node models (G10) the maximum number of this adapter is three. For

dual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For single-node models (G10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is 2, 3

and 4. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installing this

adapter is 2, 1, and 4.

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007)

Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card.

This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T network

topologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cable

distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair

(UTP) media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is

four.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is

slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this

adapter is slots 1, 2, and 4.

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems 151

Page 182: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008)

Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR)

PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. It supports a maximum distance

of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre (MMF) media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is

four.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is

slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this

adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009)

Feature code 1009 is a four-port gigabit Ethernet network interface card that

provides full TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) capability and iSCSI acceleration. The

TOE function includes TCP and UDP checksum offload and large send offload. The

iSCSI acceleration includes header and data digest (CRC) generation and

verification.

This gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T) PCI-X TOE feature provides four RJ-45

connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or

better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is

four.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is

slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this

adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)

Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The

adapter has two copper RJ-45 connections.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter

is six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this

adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority

order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011)

Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapter

has two optical LC duplex connectors.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter

is six.

152 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 183: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for installing this

adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority

order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016)

Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adapter

contains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) and

two 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers are

only expected to use the two external connectors.

This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tape

devices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one at

each end.

For single-node models (A10 and G10) the maximum number of this adapter is

three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter is

six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this

adapter is slots 4, 3, and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority

order for installing this adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only)

(FC 1018)

Feature code 1018 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by

MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote

advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are

required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is

carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal

Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered

(one for each node of a dual-node cluster).

This adapter must be installed in slot 2.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP Version 7.2.3 or later.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019)

Feature code 1019 is a PCI-X dual-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This

adapter may only be used to provide additional FCP target ports; it may not be

used to attach storage expansion units. FCP target ports are used by application

servers on a Fibre Channel storage area network (SAN) for performing I/O to LUNs

on the N5200 or N5500 using Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). It auto-negotiates to

speeds of 1, 2, or 4 Gbps.

Two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable

lengths.

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems 153

Page 184: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 97. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019) - Maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

two. For a dual-node model (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is

four.

For single-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 3, 4

and 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots

1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020)

Feature code 1020 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. It supports 10BASE-T,

100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T network topologies. The adapter provides two

RJ-45 connections and supports a maximum cable length of 100 meters using

Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is

three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter

is six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this

adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority

order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027)

Feature code 1027 is a quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA). It

auto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps. It may only be used for attaching storage

expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on

this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has four small form factor (SFP) multi-mode optics with LC style

connectors. It supports the following maximum cable lengths:

Table 98. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1027) - Maximum

cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For

dual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.

154 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 185: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied

by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034)

Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre

Channel.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node

models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied

by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems 155

Page 186: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

156 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 187: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and

N5600 systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N5300 and N5600.

Table 99. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical)

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment

1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical)

1022 Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper)

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper)

1024 Dual-port Ultra320 SCSI HBA for tape attachment

1026 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter

1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/G20 models only)

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA

1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N5300

and N5600:

1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1014, 1015, 1017, 1029,

1032, 1033, and 1035)

2. Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI adapter cards (FC 1021 and 1026)

3. Ethernet Network Interface cards (FC 1012, 1013, 1022, 1023, and 1031)

4. Dual-port Ultra320 SCSI HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024)

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed

three. For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed

six.

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to

the IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)

Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This

adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275

meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this

adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum

number of this adapter is six.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 157

Page 188: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)

Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter

supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This

adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters

using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this

adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum

number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)

Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter

auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching

"back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The

Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style

connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 100. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable

lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this

adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum

number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)

Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.

This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter

supports the following maximum cable lengths.

158 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 189: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Table 101. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable

lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this

adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum

number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)

Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.

This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providing

two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storage

expansion units (EXN1000s, EXN2000s, and EXN4000s).

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter

supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 102. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this

adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum

number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021)

Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter

is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this

adapter is six.

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems 159

Page 190: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper) (FC 1022)

Feature code 1022 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet TOE adapter.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter

is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this

adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)

Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter

supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four

RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category

5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter

is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this

adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port Ultra320 SCSI HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024)

Feature code 1024 is a dual-port Ultra320 SCSI host bus adapter (HBA) for tape

attachment.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter

is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this

adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)

Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter

is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this

adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

160 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 191: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching disk expansion

units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This

adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form

factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable

lengths:

Table 103. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum

cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapter is

three. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of this

adapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority

order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031)

Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that provides

dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using

850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter

is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this

adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032)

Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by

MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote

advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are

required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is

carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal

Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2868/2869-A20/G20), two of these adapter

cards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster).

This adapter must be installed in slot 2.

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems 161

Page 192: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033)

Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre

Channel.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node

models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by

the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this

adapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment

(FC 1035)

Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and disk

expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage

controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.

Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support

the following cable lengths:

Table 104. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) -

maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapter is

three. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of this

adapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority

order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

162 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 193: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000

series systems

IBM supports optional adapter cards in the N7000 series models. The N7700 and

N7900 support a variety of optional adapter cards. The optional adapter cards are

common across all N7000 series models.

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N7700

and N7900:

1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1014, 1015, 1017, 1029,

1032, 1033, 1034, 1035)

2. iSCSI target adapters (FC 1010 and 1011) and Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target

adapters (FC 1021 and 1026)

3. Ethernet network interface cards (FC 1008, 1009, 1012, 1013, 1022, 1023, and

1031)

4. SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel tape adapters (FC 1016 and 1024)

PCI-X Adapters

All N7000 models support the following PCI-X adapters.

Table 105. Optional PCI-X Adapters

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1008 Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) TOE (optical)

1009 Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) TOE (copper)

1010 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1011 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI target adapter (optical)

1016 SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel tape HBA

1034 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (PCI-X)

For single-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters (Feature codes 1008,

1009, 1010, 1011 and 1016) cannot exceed three. For dual-node models, the total

number of PCI-X adapters (Feature codes 1008, 1009, 1010, 1011 and 1016)

cannot exceed six. For dual-node models, adapters must be ordered and added in

pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same number of

each type of adapters.

Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008)

Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR)

PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. This adapter supports a

maximum distance of 300 meters using 850 nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre

(MMF) media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a

dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. The

slot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOE

adapter is not permitted in slot 4.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 163

Page 194: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009)

Feature code 1009 is a quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T) adapter. The

adapter has four copper RJ-45 connections. This adapter supports a maximum

distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP)

four-pair media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a

dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. The

slot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOE

adapter is not permitted in slot 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)

Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The

adapter has two copper RJ-45 connections.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a

dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The

slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011)

Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapter

has two optical LC duplex connectors.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a

dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The

slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9.

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016)

Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adapter

contains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) and

two 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers are

only expected to use the two external connectors.

This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tape

devices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one at

each end.

For the single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is three. For the

dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The

slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 9, 3.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034)

Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre

Channel.

164 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 195: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node

models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The

slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.

PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters

N7000 series models support the following PCIe adapters.

Table 106. Optional PCIe adapters

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical)

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment

1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)

1022 Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper)

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper)

1024 Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment

1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter

1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/G20 models only)

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (PCIe)

1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed five.

For the dual-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed ten.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)

Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This

adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275m

using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For a

dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)

Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter

supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 165

Page 196: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters

using Category 5 or better UTP four-pair media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For a

dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)

Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter

auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching

"back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The

Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may NOT be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style

connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 107. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable

lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a

dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)

Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.

This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter

supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 108. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable

lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a

dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

166 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 197: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

This feature code will include a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC

connectors.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)

Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.

This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providing

two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storage

expansion units.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter

supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 109. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the

dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is eight.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)

Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE)

adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSI

hosts.

For single-node models (2866/2867-A11/G11), the maximum number of this adapter

is five. For dual-node models (2866/2867-A21/G21), the maximum number of this

adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper) (FC 1022)

Feature code 1022 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet TOE adapter.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For

dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 167

Page 198: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)

Feature code 1023 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and

1000Base-T) PCIe feature that provides four RJ-45 connectors. The maximum

supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or better, unshielded twisted

pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the

dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024)

Feature code 1024 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel host bus adapter (HBA)

designed to support connection to a tape device. The adapter includes two 68-pin

VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Two SCSI LVD two-meter

cables (for connecting to the tape device) are included. These cables have 68-pin

VHDCI connectors on each end.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a

dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)

Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that provides

two Ethernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts.

For the single-node mode the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the

dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching disk expansion

units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This

adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form

factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable

lengths:

Table 110. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum

cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

168 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 199: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For the single-node model (A11) the maximum number of this adapter is five. For

the dual-node model (A21) the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a

dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031)

Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that provides

dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using

850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.

For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the

dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,

7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032)

Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by

MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote

advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are

required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is

carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal

Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (A21/G21), two of these adapter cards must

be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster).

This adapter must be installed in slot 1.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033)

Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre

Channel.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node

models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8. For a dual-node

configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 169

Page 200: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment

(FC 1035)

Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and disk

expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage

controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.

Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support

the following cable lengths:

Table 111. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) -

maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre

62.5 micron multi-mode

fibre

1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters

2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For the single-node model (2866/2867-A11) the maximum number of this adapter is

five. For the dual-node model (2866/2867-A21) the maximum number of this

adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,

and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a

dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

170 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 201: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix I. IBM System Storage N series documentation

The following lists present an overview of the IBM System Storage N series

hardware and Data ONTAP product libraries, as well as other related documents.

You can access the documents listed in these tables at the following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

N7000 series systems library

v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7953

v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC26-7954

v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC26-7956

N5000 series systems library

v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7785

v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC26-7784

v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC26-7838

N3300 and N3600 storage systems library

v IBM System Storage N3300 and N3600 Hardware and Service Guide,

GC27-2087

v IBM System Storage N3300 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2086

v IBM System Storage N3600 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2089

N3700 storage system library

v IBM System Storage N3700 Hardware and Service Guide, GA32-0515

v IBM System Storage N3700 Installation and Setup Instructions, GA32-0517

EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units library

v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service

Guide, GC26-7802

v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7786

v IBM System Storage EXN2000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service

Guide, GA32-0516

v IBM System Storage EXN2000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2064

v IBM System Storage EXN4000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service

Guide, GC27-2080

v IBM System Storage EXN4000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2079

Data ONTAP 7.2 filer library

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Release Notes, GC26-7963

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 171

Page 202: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration

Guide, GC26-7964

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 File Access and Protocols

Management Guide, GC26-7965

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Storage Management Guide,

GC26-7966

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Online Backup

and Recovery Guide, GC26-7967

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Tape Backup and

Recovery Guide, GC26-7968

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 MultiStore Management Guide,

GC26-7969

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Network Management Guide,

GC26-7970

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page

Reference, Volume 1, GC26-7971

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page

Reference, Volume 2, GC26-7972

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Upgrade Guide, GC26-7976

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Block Access Management Guide

for iSCSI & FCP, GC26-7973

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 System Administration Guide,

GC26-7974

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Software Setup Guide,

GC26-7975

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Core Commands Quick

Reference, GC26-7977

Data ONTAP 7.1 filer library

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7862

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and

Management Guide, GC26-7790

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 File Access and Protocols

Management Guide, GA32-0520

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Storage Management Guide,

GA32-0521

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Online Backup

and Recovery Guide, GA32-0522

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Tape Backup and

Recovery Guide, GA32-0523

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 MultiStore Management Guide,

GA32-0524

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Network Management Guide,

GA32-0525

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page

Reference, Volume 1, GA32-0526

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page

Reference, Volume 2, GA32-0527

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Upgrade Guide, GC26-7791

172 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 203: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Block Access Management Guide

for iSCSI and FCP, GA32-0528

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 System Administration Guide,

GA32-0529

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Software Setup Guide,

GA32-0530

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Core Commands Quick

Reference, GA32-0531

Data ONTAP 7.2 gateway systems library

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Gateway Release Notes,

GC26-7955

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Software Setup,

Installation, and Management Guide, GC26-7962

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Connecting Your

System, GC26-7990

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Planning Guide,

GC26-7957

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Upgrade Guide,

GC26-7958

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Installation

Requirements, Quick Start, and Reference Guide, GC27-2092

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Metrocluster Guide,

GC27-2091

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide

for IBM Storage, GC26-7959

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Data ONTAP 7.2 Implementation Guide

for IBM SAN Volume Controller Storage, GC27-2061

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide

for Hitachi Storage, GC26-7960

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide

for HP XP Storage, GC26-7961

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide

for HP EVA, GC27-2093

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide

for EMC CLARiiON Storage, GC27-2081

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide

for EMC Symmetrix Storage, GC27-2094

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide

for 3PAR Storage, GC27-2090

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide

for Fujitsu ETERNUS Storage, GC27-2082

Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC26-7839

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for IBM Storage,

GC26-7840

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for Hitachi Storage,

GC26-7841

Appendix I. IBM System Storage N series documentation 173

Page 204: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for HP Storage,

GC26-7858

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Upgrade Guide, GC26-7859

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, and

Management Guide, GC26-7886

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7837

Other N series and N series-related documents

v IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide, GC27-2088 (previously

called the IBM System Storage N series Error Messages and Troubleshooting

Guide, GC26-7984)

v IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide, GC26-7789

v IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0543

v IBM System Storage N series AutoSupport Overview, GC26-7854

v IBM System Storage N series: Changing the cluster cfmode Setting in Fibre

Channel SAN Configurations, GC26-7876

v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide,

SG24-7496

v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00

v IBM System Storage Systems Safety Notices, G229-9054

v IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Models

200 and N00, GC26-7993

174 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 205: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in

other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the

products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM

product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM

product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,

program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be

used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the

operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter

described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any

license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation

North Castle Drive

Armonk, NY 10504-1785

U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other

country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS

PUBLICATIONS “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or

implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to

you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be

incorporated in new editions of the publications. IBM may make improvements

and/or changes in the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this publication at

any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for

convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those

Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this

IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes

appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Attention: In compliance with the GNU General Public License (GPL), Version 2,

June 1991, a complete machine-readable copy of the source code for the relevant

source code portions of the Remote LAN Module (RLM) Firmware that are covered

by the GPL, is available from http://now.netapp.com.

Copyrights

Copyright © 2005–2008 IBM Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 175

Page 206: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

References in this documentation to IBM products, programs, or services do not

imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM

operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to

state or imply that only IBM’s product, program or service may be used. Any

functionally equivalent product, program or service that does not infringe any of

IBM’s intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program

or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other

products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user’s responsibility.

Trademarks

The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation

in the United States, other countries, or both:

IBM System i

IBM logo System p

AIX System Storage

Eserver System x

RS/6000 System z

Tivoli

NetApp, the Network Appliance logo, the bolt design, NetApp–the Network

Appliance Company, Data ONTAP, DataFabric, FAServer, FilerView, gFiler,

MultiStore, NearStore, NetCache, SecureShare, SnapManager, SnapMirror,

SnapMover, SnapRestore, SnapVault, SyncMirror, and WAFL are registered

trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States, and/or other countries.

gFiler, Network Appliance, SnapCopy, SnapLock, Snapshot, and The Evolution of

Storage are trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States and/or other

countries and registered trademarks in some other countries. ApplianceWatch,

BareMetal, Camera-to-Viewer, ComplianceClock, ComplianceJournal,

ContentDirector, ContentFabric, EdgeFiler, FlexClone, FlexVol, FPolicy, HyperSAN,

InfoFabric, LockVault, Manage ONTAP, NOW, NOW NetApp on the Web, ONTAPI,

RAID-DP, RoboCache, RoboFiler, SecureAdmin, Serving Data by Design,

SharedStorage, Simulate ONTAP, Smart SAN, SnapCache, SnapDirector,

SnapDrive, SnapFilter, SnapMigrator, SnapSuite, SnapValidator, SohoFiler, vFiler,

VFM, Virtual File Manager, VPolicy, and Web Filer are trademarks of Network

Appliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NetApp Availability

Assurance and NetApp ProTech Expert are service marks of Network Appliance,

Inc. in the United States.

Network Appliance is a licensee of the CompactFlash and CF Logo trademarks.

Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its

subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other

countries.

All other brands or products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their

respective holders and should be treated as such.

176 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 207: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Electronic emission notices

The following statements apply to this product. The statements for other products

intended for use with this product will appear in their accompanying manuals.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the

equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,

uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause

harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the

interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to

meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television

interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by

unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or

modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du

Canada.

European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council

Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States

relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any

failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended

modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A

Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The

limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial

environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed

communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate

measures.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to

reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and

to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are

Notices 177

Page 208: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

available from IBM authorized dealers. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any

interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors.

European Community contact:

IBM Technical Regulations

Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569

Tele: 0049 (0)711 7851176

Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283

e-mail: [email protected]

Australia and New Zealand Class A statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate

measures.

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen

Verträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG

zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit

in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu

installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM

empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für

die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der

IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne

Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

"Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im

Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber

verlangt werden, angemessene Mabnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen."

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische

Verträglichkeit von Geräten

Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit

von Geräten (EMVG)." Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in

der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die

elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG

Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das

EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland

GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart.

178 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 209: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022

Klasse A.

People’s Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Taiwan Class A warning statement

Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement

Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Notices 179

Page 210: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

180 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 211: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Index

Numerics2101 Model N00 133

7014 model T00 rack 134

7014 model T42 rack 135

Aabout this document

how to send your comments xxvii

AC power line sizes 121

active/active configurations 4

adapter support 3

adaptersoptional cards

N3600 145

N5200 and N5500 149

N5300 and N5600 157

N7700 and N7900 163

address, IBM xxvii

Advanced Single Instance Storage 76

attention notice xiii

audience xxiii

AutoSupport 119

Ccables

labeling 114

measuring 114

planning 113

caution notices xiii

definition xiii

examples xiii

CFO 76

CIFS protocol 75

Class A electronic emission notice 177

clearance dimensions 105

EXN1000 expansion unit 103

N3300 storage system 87

N3600 storage system 87

N3700 storage system 96

N5200 storage system 98

N5300 storage system 98

N5500 storage system 98

N5600 storage system 98

N7700 storage system 101

N7900 storage system 101

clustering 4

Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables 113

N3700 system setup worksheet 130

comments, how to send xxvii

configuration limitsFibre Channel 63

host operating system configuration limits for Fibre

Channel 65

host operating system configuration limits for

iSCSI 65

configuration limits (continued)iSCSI 63

N3300 storage systemactive/active 68

single-controller 67

N3600 storage systemactive/active 68

single-controller 67

N3700 storage systemactive/active 69

single-controller 69

N5200 storage systemactive/active 66

single-controller 65

N5300 storage systemactive/active 66

single-controller 65

N5500 storage systemactive/active 66

single-controller 65

N5600 storage systemactive/active 66

single-controller 65

N7700 storage systemactive/active 66

single-controller 65

N7900 storage systemactive/active 66

single-controller 65

connectionsexpansion unit to N series filers 116

expansion unit to other expansion units 116

expansion units to an N series storage system 115

gateway to external storage 23, 31, 38, 46, 53, 61,

116

conventionscommand xxvi

formatting xxvi

keyboard xxvii

Ddanger notices xi

definition xi

example xi

Data ONTAP 3, 75

Data ONTAP 7.1 filerdocumentation 172

Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library 173

Data ONTAP 7.2 filerdocumentation 171

Data ONTAP 7.2 gateway systems library 173

device carrier xxvi

disk sanitization 76

documentationData ONTAP 7.1 filer 172

Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway 173

Data ONTAP 7.2 filer 171

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 181

Page 212: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

documentation (continued)Data ONTAP 7.2 gateway 173

EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion

units 171

IBM System Storage N series 170

N series-related documents 174

N3300 and N3600 storage system 171

N3700 storage system 171

N5000 series systems 171

N7000 series systems 171

Eelectrical requirements

EXN1000 expansion unit 104

EXN2000 expansion unit 106

EXN4000 expansion unit 106

N3300 storage system 88

N3600 storage system 88

N3700 storage system 97

N5200 storage system 99

N5300 storage system 99

N5500 storage system 100

N5600 storage system 100

N7700 storage system 102

N7900 storage system 103

Electronic emission noticesAustralia and New Zealand Class A statement 178

European Union EMC Directive conformance

statement 177

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

statement 177

Industry Canada Class A emission compliance

statement 177

Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference

(VCCI) statement 179

Korean Class A warning statement 179

Taiwanese Class A warning statement 179

environmentalnotices xi

environmental requirementsEXN1000 expansion unit 103

EXN2000 expansion unit 105

EXN4000 expansion unit 105

N3300 storage system 88

N3600 storage system 88

N3700 storage system 96

N5200 storage system 98

N5300 storage system 98

N5500 storage system 98

N5600 storage system 98

N7700 storage system 102

N7900 storage system 102

Ethernet adapter support 3

EXN1000 expansion unithardware features 70

hardware specifications 103

mixing 2

power cords 123

support 2

EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units

library 171

EXN2000 expansion unithardware features 71

hardware specifications 105

mixing 2

power cords 123

support 2

EXN4000 expansion unithardware features 72

hardware specifications 105

mixing 2

power cords 123

support 2

expansion unit cablingdifferences between early and current N3700 CPU

module designs 15

expansion unitscabling requirements (filers only) 116

connecting to an N series storage system 115

connecting to N series filers 116

connecting to other expansion units 116

connecting to the N3700 15

connecting to the N5200 filer 19

connecting to the N5300 filer 27

connecting to the N5500 filer 34

connecting to the N5600 filer 41

connecting to the N7700 filer 49

connecting to the N7900 filer 57

mixing 2

support 2

FFCC Class A notice 177

FCP protocol 75

featuresEXN1000

hardware 70

EXN2000hardware 71

EXN4000hardware 73

host software 83

N3300 storage systemhardware 7, 10

N3600 storage systemhardware 10, 13

N3700 storage systemhardware 13, 17

N5200 filerhardware 17, 20

N5200 gatewayhardware 22, 24

N5300 filerhardware 25, 28

N5300 gatewayhardware 29, 31

N5500 filerhardware 32, 35

182 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 213: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

features (continued)N5500 gateway

hardware 36, 38

N5600 filerhardware 39, 43

N5600 gatewayhardware 44, 46

N7700 filerhardware 47, 50

N7700 gatewayhardware 52, 53

N7900 filerhardware 55, 58

N7900 gatewayhardware 60, 62

power cords 123

software 79

support xxiii

Fibre Channel configuration limits 63

Fibre Channel expansion adaptersdescriptions 163

filer, defined xxvi

FilerView 75

fire suppression xxii

FlexClone 76

FlexVol 75

floor loading, T00 rack 137

floor loading, T42 rack 137

floor plan considerations 110

floor-loading specifications 110

form, reader comment xxvii

FRU/CRU listfeature codes 123

Ggateway

connecting to external storage 23, 31, 38, 46, 53,

61, 116

gateway, defined xxvi

general considerations 108

Hhardware service and support xxv

hardware specificationsEXN1000 expansion unit 103

EXN2000 expansion unit 105

EXN4000 expansion unit 105

N3300 storage system 87

N3600 storage system 87

N3700 storage system 95

N5200 storage system 97

N5300 storage system 97

N5500 storage system 97

N5600 storage system 97

N7700 storage system 101

N7900 storage system 101

host operating system configuration limits for Fibre

Channel 65

host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI 65

host software features 83

how to send your comments xxvii

IIBM

address xxvii

IBM safety information 174

Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables 113

input power considerations 108

inspection, safety xv

installationrack xv

interoperability 3

iSCSI configuration limits 63

iSCSI protocol 75, 76

Llabels, safety xii

laser safety xiv

load board, N3700 14

LockVault Compliance 76

LockVault Enterprise 77

MMetroCluster 77

Microsoft Exchange Bundle 77

MultiStore 77

NN series

related documents 174

N series documentation 170

N series storage system software 75

N00 rack specifications 133

N3300 and N3600 storage system library 171

N3300 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 68

clearance dimensions 87

electrical requirements 88

environmental requirements 88

featureshardware 7

hardware specifications 87

mixing EXN units 2

noise emission notes 88

physical characteristics 87

power cords 123

setup worksheet 127

single-controllerconfiguration limits 67

N3600 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 68

adapter support 3

clearance dimensions 87

Index 183

Page 214: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N3600 storage system (continued)electrical requirements 88

environmental requirements 88

featureshardware 10

hardware specifications 87

mixing EXN units 2

noise emission notes 88

physical characteristics 87

power cords 123

setup worksheet 127

single-controllerconfiguration limits 67

N3700 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 69

adapter support 3

cabling to expansion units 14

clearance dimensions 96

cluster setup worksheet 130

differences between early and current CPU module

designs 14

electrical requirements 97

environmental requirements 96

featureshardware 13

hardware specifications 95

load board 14

noise emission notes 96

physical characteristics 95

power cords 123

raw storage capacity 16

setup worksheet 129

single-controllerconfiguration limits 69

N3700 storage system library 171

N5000 series systems library 171

N5200 filerfeatures

hardware 17

mixing EXN units 2

raw storage capacity 19

N5200 gatewayfeatures

hardware 22

N5200 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 66

adapter support 4

clearance dimensions 98

electrical requirements 99

environmental requirements 98

hardware specifications 97

noise emission notes 99

physical characteristics 97

power cords 123

single-controllerconfiguration limits 65

system setup worksheet 131

N5300 filerfeatures

hardware 25

mixing EXN units 2

N5300 gatewayfeatures

hardware 29

N5300 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 66

adapter support 4

clearance dimensions 98

electrical requirements 99

environmental requirements 98

hardware specifications 97

noise emission notes 99

physical characteristics 97

power cords 123

raw storage capacity 27

single-controllerconfiguration limits 65

system setup worksheet 131

N5500 filerfeatures

hardware 32

mixing EXN units 2

N5500 gatewayfeatures

hardware 36

N5500 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 66

adapter support 4

clearance dimensions 98

electrical requirements 100

environmental requirements 98

hardware specifications 97

noise emission notes 99

physical characteristics 97

power cords 123

raw storage capacity 34

single-controllerconfiguration limits 65

system setup worksheet 131

N5600 filerfeatures

hardware 39

mixing EXN units 2

N5600 gatewayfeatures

hardware 44

N5600 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 66

adapter support 4

clearance dimensions 98

electrical requirements 100

environmental requirements 98

hardware specifications 97

noise emission notes 99

physical characteristics 97

184 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 215: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

N5600 storage system (continued)power cords 123

raw storage capacity 42

single-controllerconfiguration limits 65

system setup worksheet 131

N7000 series systems library 171

N7700 filerfeatures

hardware 47

mixing EXN units 2

N7700 gatewayfeatures

hardware 52

N7700 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 66

adapter support 4

clearance dimensions 101

electrical requirements 102

environmental requirements 102

hardware specifications 101

noise emission notes 102

physical characteristics 101

power cords 123

raw storage capacity 49

single-controllerconfiguration limits 65

system setup worksheet 132

N7900 filerfeatures

hardware 55

mixing EXN units 2

N7900 gatewayfeatures

hardware 60

N7900 storage systemactive/active

configuration limits 66

adapter support 4

clearance dimensions 101

electrical requirements 103

environmental requirements 102

hardware specifications 101

noise emission notes 102

physical characteristics 101

power cords 123

raw storage capacity 57

single-controllerconfiguration limits 65

system setup worksheet 132

NearStore 77

NFS protocol 75

noise emission notesEXN1000 expansion unit 104

EXN2000 expansion unit 106

EXN4000 expansion unit 106

N3300 storage system 88

N3600 storage system 88

N3700 storage system 96

N5200 storage system 99

noise emission notes (continued)N5300 storage system 99

N5500 storage system 99

N5600 storage system 99

N7700 storage system 102

N7900 storage system 102

notices 175

attention xiii

caution xiii

danger xi

electronic emission 177

FCC, Class A 177

safety xvi

safety and environmental xi

types xi

used in this document xxiv

OOperation Manager Core (OMC) 83

optical port terminators xiv

optional adapter cardsdescriptions

N3600 145

N5200 and N5500 149

N5300 and N5600 157

N7700 and N7900 163

overview, planning 1

PPCI-Express (PCIe) adapters 165

PCI-X adaptersoptional 163

physical characteristicsEXN1000 expansion unit 103

EXN2000 expansion unit 105

EXN4000 expansion unit 105

N3300 storage system 87

N3600 storage system 87

N3700 storage system 95

N5200 storage system 97

N5300 storage system 97

N5500 storage system 97

N5600 storage system 97

N7700 storage system 101

N7900 storage system 101

physical planning 1, 87

planning 1, 87

power cords 107, 123

feature codes 123

power supplies and power requirements 107

Protection Manager 83

Rrack installation

safety xv

rack mount requirements 73, 107

rack relocation xviii

safety xviii

Index 185

Page 216: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

rack safety xv

rack specificationsfor IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack 141

general 138

IBM 2101 Model N00 133

IBM 7014 134

reader comment form processing xxvii

restrictions, usage xiv

Ssafety

environmental notices xi

inspection procedure xv

labels xi

laser xiv

notices xi, xvi

rack xv

rack installation xv

rack relocation xviii

safety labels xii

safety requirements for non-IBM rack 141

security 111

Single Mailbox Recovery 83

site planning 1, 87

SMBR Content Analysis Wizard 83

SnapDrive 83

SnapLock Compliance 77

SnapLock Enterprise 77

SnapManager for Exchange 78, 83

SnapManager for Oracle 84

SnapManager for SAP 78

SnapManager for SharePoint 78

SnapManager for SQL 78, 83

SnapMirror 78

SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 78

SnapMover 78

SnapRestore 78

SnapShot 75

SnapValidator 79

SnapVault Primary 79

SnapVault Secondary 79

software features 79

software, N series storage system 75

specifications for the N series storage system 87

support for Ethernet adapters 3

supported features xxiii

SyncMirror 79

TT00 and T42 rack caster location 135

T00 and T42 rack service clearances 135

T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments 136

T00 rack weight distribution and floor loading 137

T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading 137

tasks by document title 170

terminatorsoptical ports xiv

terminology xxvi

thermal considerations 109

third-party devicesconnection differences between early and current

N3700 CPU module designs 15

UUnited States electronic emission Class A notice 177

United States FCC Class A notice 177

usage restrictions xiv

WWeb sites, related xxv

weight distribution, T00 rack 137

weight distribution, T42 rack 137

worksheetsN3300 system setup 127

N3600 system setup 127

N3700 cluster system setup 130

N3700 system setup 129

N5000 series system setup 131

N7000 series system setup 132

Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) 3

186 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Page 217: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Readers’ comments—we would like to hear from you

IBM System Storage N series

Introduction and Planning Guide

Publication No. GA32-0543-11

We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy,

organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the

information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.

For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your IBM

business partner, or your authorized remarketer.

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any

way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use the

personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.

Comments:

Thank you for your support.

Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.

If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:

Name

Address

Company or Organization

Phone No. E-mail address

Page 218: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You GA32-0543-11

GA32-0543-11

���

Cut or FoldAlong Line

Cut or FoldAlong Line

Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

NO POSTAGENECESSARYIF MAILED IN THEUNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

International Business Machines Corporation

Information Development

Dept. GZW

9000 South Rita Road

Tuscon, AZ

U.S.A. 85744-0001

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

_

Page 219: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide
Page 220: IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide

���

Printed in USA

GA32-0543-11